JP7104679B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, there are some that can execute a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. ..

In this type of gaming machine, as a suggestion effect, there is a device capable of executing a plurality of stages of reach effect that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state as it develops (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-348951

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a high possibility that the reach effect will be controlled to an advantageous state if the reach effect is developed, but there is a sense of expectation that the reach effect will be controlled to an advantageous state at each stage. There was a problem that it could not be increased suitably.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing a sense of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image and outputs a sound at a predetermined volume.
A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see, and
A first specific effect suggesting that the first specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific effect suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. A specific effect execution means that can execute either one after the special effect, and
When the second specific effect is executed, a special notification effect for notifying that the second specific effect is executed after the special effect and before the start of the second specific effect is provided. Executable special notification effect execution means and
With
In a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered from the predetermined volume.
The special effect execution means is
The first special effect of lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume in the first period, and the mode of lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume and making it difficult to see in the second period longer than the first period are described above. It is possible to execute a second special effect that is different from the first special effect.
The second special effect is executed before either the first specific effect or the second specific effect is executed.
In the variable display of 1, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the first special effect is executed or the second special effect is executed.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the gaming machine of claim 2 is
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images is provided.
The special notification effect executing means notifies that the second specific effect is executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images larger than the suggested image.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image and outputs a sound at a predetermined volume.
A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see, and
The first specific effect that can be executed after the special effect and suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state, and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. The second specific effect that suggests, the specific effect execution means that can execute, and
When executing the second specific effect, it is possible to execute a special notification effect that notifies that the second specific effect is to be executed after the special effect and before the start of the second specific effect. Special notification effect execution means and
With
In a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered from the predetermined volume.
The special effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a first special effect that lowers the sound output below the predetermined volume in the first period and a second special effect that lowers the sound output below the predetermined volume in the second period longer than the first period. And
It is characterized in that the second special effect is executed before the specific effect is executed.
According to these features, it is expected that the predetermined image will be difficult to see due to the special effect and the sound or light output will be suppressed for a short period or a long period, so that the predetermined image will be controlled in an advantageous state. The feeling can be suitably improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table, the jackpot type determination table, the small hit type determination table, and the jackpot type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for effect control and the reception command buffer at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit A and big hit B is finished. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit C and big hit D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit E is finished. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol and the opening pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol fixing period and the opening / closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the panel display effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern determination ratio of a panel display effect, and each display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the result image display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background image update process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start processing. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the 2nd special symbol when it is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D ends. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the 2nd special symbol when it is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit E ends. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and each effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit A ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D and big hit E is finished. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display in the modification 239SG-1. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of an effect to be executed as a suggestion effect during rear variable display in the modified example 239SG-1, and an effect pattern of a jackpot suggestion effect and a setting suggestion effect to be executed as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during front variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect during front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the advance notice effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the advance notice effect. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the staging operation of the advance notice staging. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the composition of the production of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the staging operation of the super reach α1. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of super reach β2. (A) is a diagram comparing the production contents of the first stage effect and the second stage effect, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display status of the dialogue. (A) is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the reach title. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the staging operation of the pre-stage staging and the post-stage staging. (A) is a diagram showing a change mode in the switching effect, (B) is a diagram comparing the notice effect and the switching effect, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display periods of the notice effect and the switching effect. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of a switching effect. (I) to (L) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of a switching effect. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an example of super reach effect operation in the feature portion 175SG modification 1. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a special effect example 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a special effect example 2. (A) to (H) are explanatory views showing an example of a super reach effect operation as a modification. Similarly, (I) to (L) are explanatory views showing an example of a super reach effect operation as a modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 239SG form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
When the variable display is performed based on the establishment of the execution condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening by the game ball) and the variable display result becomes a predetermined result (for example, a small hit). It is controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state), and the gaming medium passes through a specific area (for example, the third count switch 239SG024B) during the predetermined gaming state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, an advantageous state (for example). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state).
The game control means (for example, the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 10-17 by the CPU 103) can control the game state after the end of the advantageous state to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the execution condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state. The part that executes) and
When controlled to the special state, a display means (for example, a panel of characters A to D as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (C)) capable of displaying a plurality of types of special displays related to the variable display (for example, a panel of characters A to D) can be displayed. Image display device 5) and
With
As the special display, the display means is a first special display corresponding to one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (C), one second special display after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A. As shown in the panel of characters A to C corresponding to the time saving state for the variable display of the symbol and the second special display corresponding to the variable display multiple times (for example, FIG. 10-37 (B)). Character D panel corresponding to the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the big hit game of the big hit B (Character D compatible panel for the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B)) Is characterized by being able to display.
According to this feature, different special displays are displayed according to the number of variable displays executed in the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The first pattern (for example, the variable display result) is controlled to a predetermined gaming state when the variable display result becomes the predetermined result, and is controlled to an advantageous state by passing the game medium through the specific area during the predetermined gaming state. In the case of a small hit, the part controlled to the big hit game state by the game ball passing through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small hit game) and when the variable display result becomes a specific result, it is determined. The second pattern that controls to an advantageous state without being controlled by the gaming state (for example, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the part that is controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled by the small hit gaming state), Have,
The game control means
As the special state, the target is the first special state in which the special state ends when one variable display is executed (for example, one variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A). (Time saving state) and the second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed a plurality of times (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the jackpot game of the jackpot B ends) is targeted. It is possible to control the time saving state) and
The second special state can be controlled even in the advantageous state by the second pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the big hit type is a big hit. By being B, the part controlled to the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed),
The display means can display the second special display even in the second special state controlled after the advantageous state of the second pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-37, the jackpot B jackpot). A part in which the character D-compatible panel corresponding to the time saving state of the jackpot B after the jackpot game is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the game is completed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the special state after the advantageous state by the second pattern.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
As the special state, the game control means is a first special state in which the special state is terminated by executing one variable display (for example, one second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A). (Time saving state for variable display of) and the second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed a plurality of times (for example, three second special states after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends). It can be controlled to (time saving state for variable display of symbols) and
The display means can display the first special display and the second special display when controlled to the first special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (C), the jackpot A. The part where the panel of character A to character D can be displayed in the panel display effect in the time saving state after the big hit game of
When the second special display is displayed under the control of the first special state, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first special display is displayed (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-26). As described above, when the character D is displayed as the panel display effect in the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol once after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed, the characters A to the character are displayed as the panel display effect. The part where the ratio of variable display results to big hits is set higher than when C is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest when the second special display is displayed.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
In the special state, the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the panel display effect process and the second mode-compatible effect process as shown in FIG. 10-24) that can execute the specific effect in a plurality of different modes. Part) and
Selection effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-34 and FIGS. 10-34) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting the mode of the specific effect when the first controlled advantageous state from the normal state to the predetermined game state ends. As shown in 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode determination process during the ending effect of the jackpot A or the jackpot B after the end of the jackpot game, so that the effect mode is set to the first mode and the first mode by the operation of the player. (Parts that can be selected from 2 modes) and
With
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in the mode selected by the selected effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, if the effect mode is set to the first mode, the panel display effect If the effect mode is set to the second mode, the part that executes the effect corresponding to the second mode, which is different from the panel display effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can select the production mode of the specific production, so that the interest of the specific production can be improved.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
When the second special display is displayed on the display means, the special effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the panel display effect shown in FIG. 10-24) capable of executing the special effect (for example, the panel display effect). It has a part to execute processing)
As the special state, the game control means is a first special state in which the special state is terminated by executing one variable display (for example, one second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A). (Time saving state for variable display of) and the second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed a plurality of times (for example, three second special states after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends). It can be controlled to (time saving state for variable display of symbols) and
In the special effect, it is a plurality of times corresponding to each of the plurality of variable displays in the second special state related to the second special display, and whether or not the predetermined result is obtained for each variable display. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a winning / failing effect (for example, a winning / failing notification effect shown in FIGS. 10-37).
According to this feature, the interest in the second special state can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
At least in a normal state, a related effect of displaying a related display (for example, an image of character D) related to the second special display on the display means and an unrelated display not related to the second special display (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -33 (B), an effect execution means (for example, an effect execution means) capable of executing an unrelated effect for displaying (display of lines such as "chance!", "Hot!", "Gekiatsu!") On the display means. , The portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process after executing the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-32).
The effect executing means can execute the related effect at a higher rate than the non-related effect when controlled by at least one of a predetermined gaming state and an advantageous state (for example, shown in FIGS. 10-33). As described above, when the image of character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a notice effect, it is variable at a higher rate than when the lines such as "chance!", "Hot!", And "super hot!" Are displayed. The part where the display result is a big hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest can be further improved when the second special display is displayed.

(Characteristic part 175SG form)
The gaming machine of Form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A predetermined effect execution means capable of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound at a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, β2). When,
A special effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect) capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see.
An information display effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a pre-stage effect or a post-stage effect) that can execute an information display effect suggesting that the information is displayed to be controlled to the advantageous state after the special effect. Part) and
With
The information display effect is
A first information display effect (for example, a previous stage effect) that displays the first information composed of the first number of information, and
A second information display effect (for example, a latter stage effect) that can be executed after the first information display effect and displays second information composed of information of a second number different from the first number.
Including
The information display effect execution means is
The second information can be displayed in a display mode having a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information (for example, the dialogue in the subsequent stage effect has a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the dialogue in the front stage effect). (See Fig. 11-8 (A))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation that the information display effect is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-1.
The information display effect executing means can divide the first information into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially display the first information in the first information display effect, and divide the second information into a plurality of pieces of information in the second information display effect. Can be displayed sequentially (see FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation that the information display effect is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-2.
The second number is smaller than the first number (for example, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and the second period th2 of the first stage effect is the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 of the second stage effect. More than the number of characters displayed in.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the amount of information in the second information is smaller than that in the first information, and the information is emphasized and displayed. Therefore, the expectation that the information display effect will be controlled in an advantageous state is stepwise. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-3.
The number displayed as the second information in one period in the second information display effect is smaller than the number displayed as the first information in one period in the first information display effect (for example, each supermarket). In reach α1, α2, β1, β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is the first. 2 More than the number of characters displayed in th4 for the predetermined period.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the amount of information in the second information is smaller than that in the first information, and the information is emphasized and displayed. Therefore, the expectation that the information display effect will be controlled in an advantageous state is stepwise. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-4.
A mode when the display of the first information is finished in the first information display effect (for example, a fade-out mode) and a mode when the display of the second information is finished in the second information display effect (for example, a frame). It is characterized by being different from the out mode).
According to this feature, since the mode when the display is terminated differs between the first information and the second information, it is possible to stepwise improve the expectation that the information display effect controls the display to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-5.
A mode when the display of the first information is started in the first information display effect (for example, a fade-in mode) and a mode when the display of the second information is started in the second information display effect (for example,). It is characterized by being different from the frame-in mode).
According to this feature, since the mode when the display is started differs between the first information and the second information, it is possible to stepwise improve the expectation that the information display effect controls the display in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-6.
A special effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images after the first information display effect and before starting the second information display effect. However, the character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific image) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C is provided with a switching effect capable of switching and displaying the character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific image).
According to this feature, by executing a special effect of switching and displaying a specific image before shifting from the first information display effect to the second information display effect, the information display effect controls the advantageous state. Expectations can be improved step by step.

The gaming machine of Form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-7.
The specific image is characterized in that it is a character image (for example, character images 175SG001 to 175SG003).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-8.
A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute super reach effects A to D) capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
After the second information display effect, a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute reach title effects A to D). When,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise expectations for a specific effect.

The gaming machine of Form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-9.
The execution period of the notification effect is shorter than at least one of the display period of the first information in the first information display effect and the display period of the second information in the second information display effect (for example). The execution periods td1 to td4 of the reach title effect are shorter than the execution period tb1 of the first stage effect and the execution period ct1 of the second stage effect. See FIG. 11-5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from becoming redundant while improving the expectation for the specific effect.

The gaming machine of Form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-10.
The information display effect executing means can dynamically display at least one of the first information and the second information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of character images 175SG008 composed of one character (for example). , "Mi", "La", "Ku", and "Le") are displayed (frame-in) so that they move while rotating from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3 (dynamic display). ) Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-11.
In the first information display effect, the information display effect executing means outputs at least one of the sound output and the light output in the first output amount, and in the second information display effect, at least one of the sound output and the light output is output. A portion where a second output amount higher than the first output amount is output (for example, the effect control CPU 120 raises the output level of display, sound, and light in the latter stage effect than in the first stage effect. FIG. 11-9. (See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the information display effect can be raised step by step.

The gaming machine of Form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A predetermined effect execution means capable of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound at a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, β2). When,
A special effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect) capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see.
The first specific effects (for example, super reach effects A and B) that can be executed after the special effect and suggest that the special effects are controlled to the advantageous state, and the first specific effects are more than those when the first specific effects are executed. The second specific effect (for example, super reach effects C and D) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the super reach effect A to D). The part where D can be executed) and
When executing the second specific effect, it is possible to execute a special notification effect that notifies that the second specific effect is to be executed after the special effect and before the start of the second specific effect. Special notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a switching effect),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effects A to C) capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images. Part) and
With
In a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered from the predetermined volume (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect or the blackout effect, the display, sound, and light output levels are set. The part to be lowered. See Fig. 11-9 (A)),
The special notification effect executing means notifies that the second specific effect is executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images (for example, switching when the effect control CPU 120 is super reach β1 or β2). The part that executes the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, the specific image is switched and displayed after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound or light is suppressed. By executing the special notification effect, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1.
In the special notification effect, the period from the display of one specific image to the switching to another specific image (for example, the display period tg1) is the period after the one suggestion image is displayed in the suggestion effect. It is shorter than the period until the image is switched to another suggestion image and displayed (for example, the display period tf1) (see FIG. 11-11 (C)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, the specific image is displayed rather than the suggestive effect after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound or light is suppressed. By executing the special notification effect of switching and displaying quickly, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1 or Form 2-2.
The special notification effect executing means can switch and display the specific image larger than the suggested image (see FIG. 11-11 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by executing a special notification effect of switching and displaying a specific image larger than a predetermined image, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-3.
The special effect execution means is
A first special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that lowers the sound output below the predetermined volume in the first period, and a second special effect that lowers the sound output below the predetermined volume in the second period longer than the first period. It is possible to perform production (for example, blackout production),
The second special effect is executed before the specific effect is executed (see FIG. 11-5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is preferable that a predetermined image is difficult to see due to a special effect and the sound or light output is suppressed for a short period or a long period, so that the expectation that the predetermined image is controlled to an advantageous state is preferable. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-4.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between the case where the first special effect is executed and the case where the second special effect is executed (for example, the super reach β1 and β2 in which the blackout effect is executed are higher. , Higher expectation of big hit than Super Reach α1 and α2 where shutter effect is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the output of sound or light is suppressed.

The gaming machine of Form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-5.
The plurality of types of specific images include at least a first specific image and a second specific image having an aspect similar to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image; FIG. 11-13 (I)). (See (L))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, one specific image is changed by the switching display, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-6.
The special notification effect executing means can change the display mode of at least one of the one specific image and the other specific image in a plurality of steps.
Of the plurality of stages, a start stage image to be displayed at the start stage (for example, a blank image 175SG010), an end stage image to be displayed at the end stage (for example, a large image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003), and the start stage and the above. Includes intermediate stage images (eg, small and medium images of each character image 175SG001-175SG003) when displayed in the intermediate stage of the final stage.
The display mode of the start stage image and the end stage image and the display mode of the intermediate stage image are different (for example, the large image of the blank image 175SG010 and each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is displayed in blue, and each character image 175SG001. ~ 175SG003 small and medium images are displayed in gold)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand the change of a specific image and the switching of types.

The gaming machine of Form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-7.
The execution period of the first specific effect is shorter than the execution period of the second specific effect (for example, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach effects C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are super. The execution periods of super reach effects A and B corresponding to reach α1 and α2 are set longer than te1 and te2 (te1 = te2 <te3 = te4)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first specific effect from becoming redundant even though the special notification effect is not executed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various staging images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of an outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per ordinary drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues a staging control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The staging control CPU 120 is a process for executing the staging together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the staging control board 12, and the staging to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal indicating the operation content as appropriate). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value, which is different from the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hits is set, the set values 2 to 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value is set. In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is small for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value as in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the staging control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a reception of an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 239SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 239SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-38. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the feature unit 239SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "239SGS1", and "normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "super reach". May be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, a configuration having the same functions as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same functions will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the front side of FIG. 10-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be given with reference to the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A first reserved storage display area 239SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 239SG005U are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 239SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 239SG005U, a reserved storage display is performed in which the number of variable displays (special figure reserved storage number) corresponding to each special symbol is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed, or the pachinko gaming machine. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied because 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. The hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 239SG005D is a hold memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and is in the second hold storage display area 239SG005U. The hold memory display is a hold memory display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening.

In the feature unit 239SG, the hold storage display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening is displayed in a round white display (first hold storage display area 239SG005D). Hold memory display), and the hold memory display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is displayed in a round white display (second hold storage display area 239SG005U). Hold memory display). In addition, based on the hold memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the hold storage display generated in the above may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the number of special symbol reserved storages is placed on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first reserved storage display area 239SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 239SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for identifiable display of. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure reservation number is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reservation number is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memory of the first special figure and the number of stored memory of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

On the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 in which the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B are integrated is provided.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A on the left side and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B on the right side. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007, and the player can use the special variable winning ball unit via the cover body. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball flowing down in the 239SG007, particularly in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B.

The first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A includes a first winning opening door 239SG701 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 239SG082 (see FIG. 10-2), and is opened and closed by the first winning opening door 239SG701. Form a changing first prize opening. The first large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the left portion of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007. The first prize-winning door 239SG701 can slide and move in the front-rear direction between the closed position where the first prize-winning door is closed and the open position where the first prize-winning door is opened by driving the solenoid 239SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the ON state, the first large winning opening door 239SG701 opens the first large winning opening, and the game ball passes through (entering) the first large winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 239SG701 closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first prize opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state that is disadvantageous for the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first prize opening. You may.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first prize opening is detected by the first count switch 239SG023 by passing through the first count switch 239SG023 (see FIG. 10-2) provided in the first prize opening. Will be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 239SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 239SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening opened in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first special winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, the game ball can enter the first special winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first big winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the first big winning opening and obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first large winning opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown), and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state, the second start is performed. It is designed to win a prize in the winning opening.

The second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is formed so as to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 239SG083 (see FIG. 10-2). A door 239SG711 is provided, and the second large winning opening door 239SG711 forms a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the upper end portion of the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B. The second prize opening door 239SG711 is between the first state (open state) in which the second prize opening is opened by driving the solenoid 239SG083 and the second state (closed state) in which the second prize opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-back direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the second large winning opening door 239SG711 is in the ON state, the second large winning opening door 239SG711 sets the second large winning opening to the open state, and the game ball is second. Make it easier to pass (enter) the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the 2nd prize opening door 239SG711 is in the off state, the 2nd prize opening door 239SG711 closes the 2nd prize opening and the game ball passes through the 2nd prize opening. Make it impossible to (enter). In this way, the second prize opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the second prize opening is provided. You may.

The game ball passing (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch 239SG024A by passing through the second count switch 239SG024A installed in the second special winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 239SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening opened in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, other ordinary winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, if the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second special winning opening to obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, a game ball flow path through which the game balls that have passed through the second large winning opening can flow down is formed. In the game ball flow path, a third count switch 239SG024B that can further detect the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 239SG024A is installed. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Further, the game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , Detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

In addition, this feature unit 239SG controls the game state after the end of the small hit game to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 239SG024B during the small hit game described later. There is.

The passing gate 41 in the feature unit 239SG is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007.

In the feature unit 239SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at a substantially central position of the game area. , The weakly launched (left-handed) game ball with the hitting operation handle flows down the left game area, and the strongly launched (right-handed) game ball with the hitting ball operation handle now flows down the right game area. ing.

Further, the game ball flowing down the left game area can be won in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball flowing down the right game area can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B can win a prize and can pass through the passing gate 41. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B cannot win a prize and cannot pass through the passing gate 41.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 displays a variable display of the normal symbol, such that a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10-2. After the normal figure start condition for execution is satisfied, it is normal based on the fact that the normal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the variable display of the previous normal figure is completed. The variable display of the normal figure by the symbol display 20 is started.

In this variable display of the normal symbol, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when a predetermined time that is the variable display time of the normal symbol elapses, the confirmed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display). .. At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal drawing", expansion / opening control (tilted control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position. , Normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 10-2. For example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 10-2. After that, for example, the variable display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the variable display of the previous special figure or the end of the big hit game state. ..

In the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is displayed. Derived display of a definite special symbol (variable display result) that is the variable display result of. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. To. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 239SG, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is taken as the off symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a missed symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, or the common special symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A The 230SG701 opens the first large winning opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the first prize opening). May be good.

Further, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small hit" as a specific display result, in the small hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is used. The 2nd big winning door 239SG711 opens the 2nd big winning door in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B becomes the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In the feature unit 239SG, the second big winning opening door 239SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state. It is not limited to, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch 239SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, the third count switch 239SG024B of the game ball passes. It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 239SG024B of the gaming ball.

In the feature unit 239SG, the game ball that has won the second major winning opening always passes through the third count switch 239SG024B. That is, when a game ball wins a prize in the second big winning opening in the small hit game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 239SG024B, and after the small hit game is completed, the CPU 103 controls the game ball to the big hit game state. Will be done. In the feature unit 239SG, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball wins the second big winning opening during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is always controlled after the small hit game is completed. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 239SG024B of the game ball, the second big prize opening door 239SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is set to a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second major winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the feature unit 239SG, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 239SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second major winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the second major winning opening). good.

After the jackpot game state in the feature unit 239SG is completed, the time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time). And the normal state in which the time saving control is not performed. By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (variable display time of the special figure) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. The time saving control is that the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game ball presses the third count switch 239SG024B in the small hit game state. It suffices to end when any of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time reduction control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is shortened as compared with the normal state. , The control to shorten the variable display time (variable display time of the normal figure) of the variable display of the normal figure by the normal symbol display 20 is shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the normal figure each time is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, and the tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure". It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state, and the second start condition can be satisfied. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by enhancing the character. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the variable display of the special figure can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 10-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 239SG. The staging control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the staging control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

In the feature unit 239SG, by providing the fifth variable display result designation command and the sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the small hit type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although the possible forms are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result specification command is that the CPU 103 has a variable display result of "small hit" with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Only may be notified in advance before the start of the variable display.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the variable display stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed. The command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed. The command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure three times after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed. The command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the jackpot game of the jackpot C is completed. The command 9504H is a fifth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. The command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 239SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 239SG005U or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command for designating a winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the V prize has been won, that is, the third count switch 239SG024B has been turned on because the game ball has passed the third count switch 239SG024B. The command D2XXH is a command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number of the second special symbol in the time reduction state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) by the game ball winning a prize in the winning opening.

FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the feature unit 239SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 10-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 239SG. In this feature unit 239SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B), the feature unit 239SG is provided with a plurality of different variation patterns in advance according to the special symbol for executing the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and super reach α and super reach. There is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as β is executed. Although the feature unit 239SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), among the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in the feature unit 239SG, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed is the super reach variation. It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 239SG, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 239SG, as described above, the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is set high, so that the normal reach fluctuation pattern and super reach fluctuation are set. In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the feature unit 239SG is a non-reach variation having a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Patterns and reach variation patterns are provided.

In the feature unit 239SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-6 and the like, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), and FIG. 10-6 ( In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) Includes an out-of-figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for designating the special symbol for executing the variable display) is 1 (first), that is, For each of the cases where the first special symbol is the target of variable display and the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is the target of variable display. , A judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, only the big hit can be won, and the small hit is not won.

Further, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second Even when the special symbol is the target of the variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and about 1/7 of these judgment values are small. Since it is set as a judgment value corresponding to a hit, when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, a small hit is won with a probability (ratio) of about 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (big hit A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but whether or not the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is to be a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

In the feature unit 239SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. A small hit judgment table is provided separately, and the big hit judgment is a common table for the case where the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the case where the second special symbol is variablely displayed regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. The small hit may be determined using a separate table only when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in this feature unit 239SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit may be won.

10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 10-6 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 10-6 (C) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) is provided with two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B. On the other hand, the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one type of jackpot C. That is, the jackpot that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Only jackpot C is generated as a jackpot.

FIG. 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. The table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 239SG, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. It is supposed to be done. That is, these big hits D and big hit E are not the big hit types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game balls during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined by passing through the third count switch 239SG024B.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 239SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-6 (E). In the feature unit 239SG, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A in which the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed. ~ Big hit E is set.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit A, one time saving control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four rounds (so-called four rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot B ends, the jackpot is again hit until the special figure game is executed three times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special figure game is executed three times. Time saving control is executed until.

The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot C ends, the jackpot is again hit until the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special figure game is executed 99 times. Time saving control is executed until.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot D is completed, the jackpot is again hit until the special figure game is executed 7 times or the special figure game is executed 7 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time saving control is executed until.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot E ends, the jackpot is again hit until the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special figure game is executed 99 times. Time saving control is executed until.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time saving state ends, a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the game ball is in a small hit game. Since a big hit may be generated by winning a V prize, a so-called consecutive villa state in which a big hit game state is likely to occur continuously is obtained.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to one, so that the first variable display of the second special symbol and the one time The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 54%.

Further, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 3 times, so that the 3 times variable display of the 2nd special symbol and the 3 times The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 66%.

Further, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 7 times, so that the 7 times variable display of the second special symbol and the 7 times The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 82%.

Then, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 99 times, so that the variable display of the second special symbol of the 99 times and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the 99 times variable display of the second special symbol (the above total 103). In the variable display of the second special symbol of the times, the total of the rate at which a big hit occurs and the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100%.

In the feature unit 239SG, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. Moreover, 4 or less types may be provided.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the variation pattern determination table for jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is the normal state, and is a variation pattern of normal reach jackpots (PB1-1). For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern determination table A to which a numerical value is assigned as a determination value is provided. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A". Is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that it will be a “big hit B”. ..

Further, the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the game state is a time saving state, and is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4). ), There is provided a jackpot variation pattern determination table B in which all random numbers in the range that the variation pattern determination random number MR3 can take are assigned as determination values.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the deviation variation selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 1 or less. The pattern determination table A, the deviation pattern determination table B selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and the game state is the time saving state. The deviation pattern determination table C selected for is prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) and the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved storage numbers of the first special symbol being 3 or more. PA2-1), fluctuation pattern out of super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation, all of the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA1-3) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time reduction control. A random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the variation time of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize to be stored, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) selected during the time reduction control is more variable than the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time reduction control, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time reduction control is not executed (when the game state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time reduction control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 239SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-7, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Has been done. The game control data holding area 239SG150 shown in FIG. 10-7 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 239SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 239SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 239SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 239SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 239SG153, the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 239SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 239SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 239SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 239SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 239SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 239SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 239SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 239SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 239SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 239SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 239SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, production model, etc.). A staging control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of staging control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of variable display of a special figure, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

The staging control pattern at the time of variable display of the special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol that is the result of displaying the special symbol. From data showing the control contents of various effects such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, and various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various staging control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various staging operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The special figure variable display effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variable pattern for executing the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A). A data holding area 239SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 239SG190 shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 239SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 239SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 239SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 239SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 239SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 239SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 239SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 239SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 239SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the staging control counter setting unit 239SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 239SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 239SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 239SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 239SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the staging control buffer setting unit 239SG194. The reception command buffer 239SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 239SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the number of reserved memories Three commands called a notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 239SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the hold storage number notification command. Is associated with each other, and a storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the is finished.

Further, the start winning command buffer 239SG194A of the feature unit 239SG has a variable display corresponding panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the second special figure variable display compatible panel display effect processing (FIG. 10-25) described later. The storage area for setting the panel pattern determined flag indicating that the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage has already been determined is the buffer number "2-0" of the second special figure reservation storage. It is secured every "2-4".

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In the feature unit 239SG, it is determined whether or not the effect control CPU 120 receives the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the hold storage number notification command when executing the command analysis process (S75). When commands are received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A as the hold storage of each special figure.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 239SG will be described. FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (239SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (239SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (239SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (239SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 239SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 239SGS102 (239SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is set to "1" (239SGS103). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 239SGS101 (239SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value at 239SGS102 (239SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (239SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (239SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (239SGS104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (239SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 239SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 239SGS105 (239SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is set to "2" (S106). ..

After executing any of the processes of 239SGS103 and 239SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (239SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (239SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 239SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 239SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (239SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (239SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 239SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 239SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (239SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of the 239SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination processing (239SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (239SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 239SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (239SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y at 239 SGS 114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (239 SGS 115), and then the process proceeds to 2390 SGS 104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 239SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (239SGS116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-10 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 239 SGS 112 of FIG. 10-9 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 239SG, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 6). It is determined whether or not to control the game state and whether or not to control the small hit game state as a "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 6, 10-11 and 10-12 in FIG. 6), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and based on this determination result, the panel display effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like as described later. become.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-10, the CPU 103 first selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) (239SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 239SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (239SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 239SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

When it is determined by the 239SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot at the time of variable display (239SGS123; N), it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is 1. (239SGS124). When the start port buffer value is 2 (239SGS124; N), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 239SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is a predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (239SGS125).

When the start port buffer value is 1 in 239SGS124 (239SGS124; Y) or when the random number value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in 1239SGS125 (239SGS125; N), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the deviation is performed. The random value determination process at the time of winning is completed (239SGS126).

When the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in the 239SGS125 (239SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit is set and the winning random number value determination process is completed (239SGS127).

When the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in the 239SGS123 (239SGS123; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot is set and the winning random number value determination process is completed (239SGS128). The symbol designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. ..

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the target for which the variation pattern is set is the first special figure (239SGS131). Whether or not the target for which the fluctuation pattern is set is the first special figure may be determined, for example, by whether or not the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1".

Then, when the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is the first special figure (239SGS131; Y), the variable display result (whether or not the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set), the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the game state is displayed. Select (239SGS132).

Specifically, as the variable pattern determination table that can be selected, as described above, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit (the time saving flag is not set and the big hit flag is set). The jackpot variation pattern determination table A selected in (when), the jackpot selected when the game state is the time saving state and the variable display result is the jackpot (when the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are set) For variable pattern determination table B, when the game state is in the normal state, the variable display result is out of order (the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 1 or less. The deviation pattern determination table A selected for, the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is out (the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 3. The deviation pattern determination table B selected when the number is equal to or more, and the deviation variation selected when the game state is the time saving state (when the time saving flag is set but the jackpot flag is not set). A pattern determination table C is prepared. In these fluctuation pattern determination tables, all the values of the random number MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1, so that only the fluctuation pattern of 1 may be uniquely determined. Since the range value of the random number value MR3 is assigned to the plurality of fluctuation patterns without overlapping, any one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns may be determined.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number value of MR3 stored in association with the hold number "1" of the first special figure hold storage unit 239SG151A, and uses the read random number value in the variation pattern determination table selected by the 239SGS132. After determining the associated variation pattern as the variation pattern to be set (239SGS133), the process proceeds to 239SGS149. That is, in the 239SGS133, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random number value MR3 read from the hold storage and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, when the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is not the first special figure, that is, when it is the second special figure (239SGS131; N), is the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 239SG152 turned on? By determining whether or not (whether or not it is set), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-saving state in which time-saving control is performed (239SGS135). If the time saving flag is not set (239SGS135; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS161 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), 1 is added to the time saving state variable display count counter. After updating (239SGS136), it is determined whether or not the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set (239SGS137).

The game state flags (1st game state flag to 6th game state flag) are set corresponding to each game state specification command in which the CPU 103 sets the transmission to the effect control board 12 in the jackpot end process described later. It is a flag. In the feature unit 239SG, the first game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the first game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process, and is the second game state flag. Is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the second game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process, and the third game state flag is the effect control by the CPU 103 in the jackpot end process. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting of the third game state designation command has been made to the board, and the fourth game state flag is the fourth game state designation command to the effect control board by the CPU 103 in the jackpot end processing. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting has been performed, and the fifth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the fifth game state specification command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing. The sixth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the sixth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process.

That is, in the processing of 239SGS137, whether or not the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command to the effect control board 12 at the end of the immediately preceding jackpot game (furthermore, the immediately preceding jackpot game). Whether the time-saving state controlled after the end of the game is the time-saving state in which one time-saving control is performed after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, or the time-saving state in which the time-saving control is performed three times after the jackpot game of tail hit B is completed. It is a process of determining (whether or not).

If the second game state flag or the third game state flag is not set (239SGS137; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS172 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set. (239SGS137; Y), it is determined whether or not the time saving state variable display number counter indicating the variable display number of times after being controlled to the time saving state is 1 (239SGS138).

When the time reduction state variable display count counter is 1, that is, in the first variable display after being controlled to the time reduction state (239SGS138; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS139), and the jackpot is determined. When the flag is set (239SGS139; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to the fluctuation pattern (PB3-3) of the reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). Then (239SGS140) and proceed to 239SGS149. If the big hit flag is not set (239SGS139; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS141). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS141; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-3) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 50 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS142), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the small hit flag is not set (239SGS141; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern of the special figure variation time is 50 seconds (PA3-5). (239SGS143) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, when the time reduction state variable display count counter is not 1 (239SGS138; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS144), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS144; Y). Uniquely determines the fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), and proceeds to (239SGS145) and 239SGS149. When the big hit flag is not set (239SGS144; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS146). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS146; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS147), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS146; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS148), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

Further, in the 239SGS161, which shifts when the 239SGS135 determines "N" because the time saving flag is not set, either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set at the end of the big hit game. Judge whether or not.

Then, when either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A or the big hit B, the game state is changed. Further, when the time reduction state is controlled from the normal state (239SGS161; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS162), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS162; Y), it is determined. The variation pattern is uniquely determined as the variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS163), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the big hit flag is not set (239SGS162; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS164). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS164; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS165), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the small hit flag is not set (239SGS164; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern of the special figure variation time is 20 seconds (PA3-4). (239SGS166) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, when neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of any of the big hit games C to E. When the gaming state is further controlled from the time saving state to the normal state (239SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS167), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS167; Y). ) Is uniquely determined as the variation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), and the process proceeds to (239SGS168) and 239SGS149. If the big hit flag is not set (239SGS167; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS169). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS169; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern of the non-reach small hit (PC3-) in which the special figure variation time is 2 seconds. 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS170), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the small hit flag is not set (239SGS169; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA3-1) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 2 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS171), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

Further, when the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), but neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, and the 239SGS137 determines "N" (that is,). In the 239SGS172 that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of any of the big hit C to the big hit E), whether or not the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any of 1 to 6. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed within 6 times after being controlled to the time saving state. When the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is any of 1 to 6, 239SGS172; Y) is determined, and whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS173) is determined, and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS173). In 239SGS173; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined as the fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS174), and 239SGS149. move on. When the big hit flag is not set (239SGS173; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS175). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS175; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS176), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS175; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS177), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, when the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not any of 1 to 6, it is determined whether or not the time saving state variable display count counter is 7 (239SGS172; N) (239SGS178). When the time saving state variable display number counter is 7 (239SGS178; Y), whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. Whether or not it is determined (239SGS179).

When the fourth game state flag is not set (239SGS179; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS180), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS180; Y), it is determined. The variation pattern is uniquely determined as the variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS181), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. If the big hit flag is not set (239SGS180; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS182). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS182; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS183), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS182; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS184), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time reduction state variable display count counter is not 7 (239SGS178; N), or if the 4th game state flag is set (239SGS179; N), is the 6th game state flag set? Whether or not, that is, whether or not the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed (239SGS185).

When the sixth game state flag is not set (239SGS185; N), the above-mentioned processing of 239SGS173 to 239SGS177 is executed to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2. If the sixth game state flag is set (239SGS185; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any of 8 to 10, that is, whether or not the value is any of 8 to 10. , It is determined whether or not it is the 8th to 10th variable display of the second special figure after being controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed (239SGS186). When the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any value of 8 to 10, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS187), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS187; In Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined as the fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), and the process proceeds to (239SGS188) and 239SGS149. .. When the big hit flag is not set (239SGS187; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS189). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS189; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern of the non-reach small hit (PC3-) in which the special figure variation time is 2 seconds. 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS190), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the small hit flag is not set (239SGS189; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA3-1) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 2 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS191), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

Further, when the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not any of 8 to 10 (239SGS186; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 11. 239SGS192), when the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 11, that is, when the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E (239SGS192; N), the above-mentioned 239SGS173 ~ 239SGS177 processing is executed to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2, and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS193), and when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS193; Y), the variation pattern is the special figure variation shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with a time of 20 seconds is uniquely determined (239SGS194), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. When the big hit flag is not set (239SGS193; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS195). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS195; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS196), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS195; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (239SGS197), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149.

In the 239SGS149, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are used according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. Make settings to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start any of the figure games. As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 239SGS149, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are made (239SGS150). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in 239SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155. In the send command buffer, it is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer. The various commands for which transmission settings have been made are transmitted to the staging control board 12 when the CPU 103 executes the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 239SGS150, the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (239SGS151). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). The time required. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (239SGS152), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (timer counting) (239SGS201).

When the symbol confirmation period timer is operating (239SGS201; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out after the symbol confirmation period timer described later is set to -1 (239SGS213) (239SGS214). .. When the symbol confirmation period timer is not timer-out (239SGS214; N), the special symbol stop process is terminated, while when the symbol confirmation period timer is timer-out (239SGS214; Y), the stop symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. (239SGS215), and if it is an outlier symbol (239SGS215; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing. (239SGS216), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

Further, when the stop symbol is not an out-of-order symbol (239SGS215; N), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol (239SGS217), and when it is a jackpot symbol (239SGS217; Y), a special symbol is used. After updating the value of the process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (239SGS218), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition to the processing of 239SGS218, the processing of setting the jackpot display time timer and the processing of setting the number of times the jackpot is opened in the opening number counter may be executed.

When the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol (239SGS217; N), the stop symbol is a small hit symbol, so the value of the special symbol process flag is set to "8" corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing. After updating to (239SGS219), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In addition to the processing of 239SGS219, the processing of setting the small hit display time timer and the processing of setting the number of times the small hit is opened in the number of times of opening counter may be executed.

On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation period timer is not operating (239SGS201; N), the fluctuation of the special symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (derived out) on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control to perform (also referred to as display) (239SGS202). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. The stop symbol is determined at the start of the variable display.

In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the staging control board 12 (239SGS203). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS204), and when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS204; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS204). In the case of 239SGS231), when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS231; N), it is further determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (239SGS246), and when the time saving flag is not set (239SGS246; N). ) Is a game state specification command that specifies the normal state corresponding to the fact that the time reduction flag is not set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS257). And the setting for transmitting the remaining second special figure time reduction notification command (239SGS258) is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 has a game state flag (1st game state flag to 6th game state) if the time reduction flag is set and the time reduction flag is set. (Flag) is cleared (239SGS205), and the hit start 1 designation command (big hit A), hit start 2 designation command (big hit B), and hit start 3 designation command are stored in the effect control board 12 according to the type of jackpot. Make settings for transmitting (big hit C) (239SGS207).

Further, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (239SGS208). Then, a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol determination period timer (239SGS209), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS231; Y), the effect control board 12 has a hit start 4 designation command (small hit A) or a hit start 5 designation command (small hit B) corresponding to the small hit. ) Is set to be transmitted (239SGS232). Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (239SGS233).

When the time saving flag is not set (239SGS233; N), the time saving flag is not set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS240). The game state specification command for designating the normal state corresponding to the above and the remaining second special figure time reduction notification command are set (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the time saving flag is set (239SGS233; Y), after the total time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (239SGS234), is the variable special figure designation buffer "1" indicating the first special figure? It is determined whether or not (239SGS235). Then, when the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS235; N), that is, when the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time reduction counter is set to -1 (). 239SGS236), 239SGS237, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS235; Y), that is, when the target of the stop display is the first special figure, 239SGS237 is displayed without executing 239SGS236. move on.

In 239SGS237, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0. Then, when the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is not 0 (239SGS237; N), the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer. After setting (239SGS240), the game state specification command for specifying the time saving state corresponding to the time saving flag being set and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command are set to be transmitted (239SGS241), and special. The symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0 (239SGS237; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared (239SGS238), and the total time reduction counter and the second special figure time reduction counter are used. After clearing the value of the counter (239SGS239), set the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS240), and it corresponds to the case where the time saving flag is not set by clearing. A setting for transmitting a game state specification command for designating a state is made (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. In the process of 239SGS241 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to execute the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set and the time saving flag is set (239SGS246; Y), that is, when the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the total time saving number counter. After -1 (239SGS249), it is determined whether or not the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (239SGS248). Then, when the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS248; N), that is, when the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time reduction counter is set to -1 (). 239SGS249), proceed to 239SGS250, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS248; Y), that is, when the target of the stop display is the first special figure, the 239SGS250 is displayed without executing 239SGS249. move on.

In the 239SGS250, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0. When the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0 (239SGS250; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared (239SGS251), and the total time reduction counter and the second special figure are displayed. After clearing the value of the time reduction counter (239SGS252), set the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS253), and the normal time corresponding to the fact that the time reduction flag is not set by clearing. A setting for transmitting a game state specification command for designating a state is made (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. In the process of 239SGS258 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to execute the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command.

Further, when the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is not 0 (239SGS250; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state variable display number counter is 7. (239SGS254). When the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (239SGS254; N), the time saving flag is set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS257). The game state specification command for specifying the time saving state corresponding to the setting and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command are set (239SGS258) to end the special symbol stop processing, while the time saving state is variable. When the value of the display count counter is 7 (239SGS254; Y), it is determined whether or not the type of the immediately preceding jackpot game is jackpot E (239SGS255). Whether or not the type of the jackpot game immediately before is the jackpot E may be determined by whether or not the big 6 game state designation command is received from the main board 11 when the time saving state is controlled.

When the type of the jackpot game immediately before is jackpot E (239SGS255; Y), the time reduction flag is set after setting the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer. The game state specification command for designating the corresponding time reduction state and the remaining second special figure time reduction number notification command are set (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot game immediately before is not jackpot E (239SGS255; N), the time reduction flag is set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer. The game state designation command for designating the time saving state corresponding to the presence and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command are set (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

In this way, in this feature unit 239SG, after the jackpot game is completed, the variable display of the number of times set in the second special figure time reduction counter is executed, or the total time reduction counter is set. The time saving state is set to continue until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the number of times is executed. Therefore, for example, when the time is controlled in the state where the second special symbol hold storage does not exist, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed before the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest due to the player missing the opportunity for the displayed result to be a small hit.

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends, but the pachinko gaming machine of the feature unit 239SG In No. 1, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (FIG. 10-23).

10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 118 of FIG. 5 as the small hit opening pre-process. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first sets the small hit display time timer by -1 (239SGS261), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timered out (239SGS262). If the small hit display time timer is not timered out (239SGS262; N), the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated, while if the small hit display time timer is timered out (239SGS262; Y), the second big prize is won. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in the opening time timer for opening the mouth (239SGS263). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (239SGS264), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119), and the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 6 as the small hit opening process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the release time timer to -1. (239SGS271). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (239SGS272).

If the open time timer is out of the timer (239SGS272; Y), it shifts to 239SGS285, and if the open time timer is not out of the timer (239SGS272; N), it is the opening timing of the second prize opening. (239SGS273). When it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to the open state by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning opening door 239SG711 (239SGS274). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening according to the round is set (239SGS275), and the process shifts to 239SGS276. The command specified during the opening of the large winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in the 239SGS275, is transmitted to the staging control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second prize opening (239SGS273; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS276 without going through 239SGS274 and 239SGS275.

In 239SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the second special winning opening (239SGS276). When it is the closing timing of the second winning opening (239SGS276; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second winning opening door 239SG711 (239SGS277). .. Then, after opening the large winning opening according to the round, the transmission setting of the designated command is set (239SGS278), and the process proceeds to 239SGS279. The command specified during the opening of the large winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in the 239SGS278, is transmitted to the staging control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second prize opening (239SGS276; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS279 without going through 239SGS277 and 239SGS278.

In the 239SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS279). If the third count switch 239SG024B is not turned on (239SGS279; N), the processing during small hit opening is completed, and if the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS279; Y), the third count switch is already on. It is determined whether or not the count switch 239SG024B is turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is set (239SGS280). If the V winning flag is set (239SGS280; Y), the processing during small hit opening is completed, and if the V winning flag is not set (239SGS280; N), the V winning flag is set (239SGS281). ..

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (239SGS282). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. Further, if the second prize opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second prize opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second prize opening door 239SG711 (239SGS283), and the opening time. Clear the timer (239SGS284).

Then, in the 239SGS285, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (S120) (239SGS285), and ends the small hit opening process.

10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S120 of FIG. 6 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, whether the CPU 103 is operating the small hit end display timer. It is determined whether or not (239SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not operating (239SGS301; N), the small hit flag is cleared (239SGS302), and the transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit is set to the effect control board 12 (239SGS303). ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (239 SGS304), and the small hit end process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is operating (239SGS301; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (239SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small hit end display timer has timed out (239SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (239SGS306; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307). If the 3rd count switch 239SG024B is not turned on (239SGS307; N), the small hit end process is finished, and if the 3rd count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307; Y), the 3rd count is already on. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the switch 239SG024B is turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch 239SG024B is set (239SGS308). If the V winning flag is set (239SGS308; Y), the small hit end process is completed, and if the V winning flag is not set (239SGS308; N), the V winning flag is set (239SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (239SGS310), and ends the small hit end process. The V prize notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

Further, when the small hit end display time has elapsed in the 239SGS306 (239SGS306; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (239SGS311). When the V winning flag is gusseted (239SGS311; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (239SGS312, 239SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type from "big hit D" and "big hit E" based on the small hit type in which the V prize is generated (239SGS314). As shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit D". When the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit B", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 (239SGS315), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember and proceed to 239SGS316.

After executing 239SGS315, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (239SGS316), which is a value corresponding to the large hit release preprocessing (S114), and ends the small hit end processing.

That is, in this feature unit 239SG, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time elapses after the small hit game ends. Therefore, even if a game ball wins in the second big winning opening immediately before the end of the small hit game, the big hit game is executed after the small hit end process is completed by passing the game ball through the third count switch 239SG024B. It is supposed to be done.

If the V winning flag is not set in the 239SGS311 (239SGS311; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110). 239SGS317), the small hit end process is completed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (239SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (239SGS321; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). Set (239SGS322) and end the process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (239SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (239SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (239SGS324). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (239SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS325). When the jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS325; Y), "1" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "5" is set in the total time reduction counter (239SGS326, 239SGS327), and 239SGS339. move on.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not jackpot A (239SGS325; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS328). When the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS328; Y), "3" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "7" is set in the total time reduction counter (239SGS329, 239SGS330), and 239SGS339. move on.

Further, when the jackpot type is not the jackpot B (239SGS328; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot C (239SGS331). When the jackpot type is jackpot C (239SGS331; Y), "99" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "100" is set in the total time reduction counter (239SGS332, 239SGS333), and 239SGS339. move on.

Further, when the jackpot type is not jackpot C (239SGS321; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot D (239SGS334). When the jackpot type is jackpot D (239SGS334; Y), "7" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "11" is set in the total time reduction counter (239SGS335, 239SGS336), and 239SGS339. move on.

When the jackpot type is not the jackpot D (239SGS334; N), it is assumed that the jackpot type is the jackpot E, and "99" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "100" is set in the total time reduction counter. Set (239SGS337, 239SGS338) and proceed to 239SGS339.

In the 239SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state designation command according to the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game. In the 239SGS339, the CPU 103 receives a second game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot A, a third game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot B, and an executed jackpot. If the jackpot type of the game is jackpot C, the 4th game state specification command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot D, the 5th game state designation command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot E The transmission setting of the sixth game state specification command may be executed. Further, the game state designation command set to be transmitted in the 239SGS 339 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 239SGS339, the CPU 103 sets "0" in the time saving state variable display count counter and ends the jackpot end process (239SGS340).

By executing each process by the CPU 103 as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, first, the second special symbol is variably displayed once as a time saving state. It is executed for 50 seconds. After the variable display ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the variable display is displayed for the first period (10 seconds) as the symbol confirmation period. It will be stopped. Then, after the first period elapses, the variable display of the second special symbol for 20 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (B), after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times as a time saving state. The first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 50 seconds, and the second and third variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 seconds. In the first and second variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the third variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the first period (10 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period elapses, the variable display of the second special symbol for 20 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), after the jackpot game of jackpot C is completed, first, 99 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed as a time saving state. The first to 98th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the 99th variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 20 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first time to the 98th time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the 99th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the first period (10 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period elapses, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 20 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the 7th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the first period (10 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period elapses, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed, first, 99 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 20 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the first period (10 seconds) as the symbol confirmation period. After the first period has elapsed, the eighth to tenth variable display of the second special symbol is executed for two seconds. Then, the eleventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 15 seconds. In the 8th to 11th variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). For the variable display of the second special symbol after the 12th time, the same control as after the jackpot game of jackpot C is completed (see FIG. 10-19 (A)) is executed.

Next, the variable display of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process processing shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 (239SGS351). When the gate switch 21 is turned on (239SGS351; Y), the processing at the time of passing through the normal gate (239SGS352) is executed. In the processing at the time of passing through the normal map gate, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is the upper limit value (for example, 4). If the number of reserved normal figures is not the upper limit, the number of reserved normal figures is incremented by 1, the value of the random number MR4 is extracted, and the extracted value is stored as a new reserved memory of the normal figure.

After executing the process at the time of passing through the normal figure gate or when the gate switch 21 is off (239SGS351; N), the CPU 103 executes any of the processes of 239SGS353 to 239SGS357 according to the value of the normal figure process flag.

The normal symbol normal processing of 239SGS353 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game (normal symbol variable display) based on the presence or absence of pending information. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, the display result derives whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (per normal figure)" based on the value of the random number value MR4 extracted in the processing when passing through the normal symbol gate. Determine (predetermine) before it is displayed. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, a confirmed normal symbol (either a hit symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal symbol normal processing ends.

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of the 239SGS354 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "1". In this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be one of those shown in FIGS. 10-22 (A) based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "hit" and the game state. Processing to be done is included. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process in the feature unit 239SG, when the display result of the normal symbol is "off" and the game state is the time saving state, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol variation time of 1. If the deviation pattern (FA1-1), which is seconds, is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "off" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is usually used. If the deviation pattern (FA1-2) with a figure fluctuation time of 30 seconds is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the game state is the time saving state, the normal symbol is displayed. When the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined as the fluctuation pattern (FB1-1) per second when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state. Is in a form in which the fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol is uniquely determined as a fluctuation pattern (FB1-2) per hit in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is 30 seconds. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

The normal symbol variation processing of the 239SGS355 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "2". This normal symbol variation process includes a process of setting the normal symbol display 20 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the like. ing. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol reaches the normal fluctuation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the normal symbol variation process ends.

The normal symbol stop processing of 239SGS356 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and making a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed normal symbol that is the display result of the normal symbol. ing. Then, when the display result is "hit", the value of the normal map process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the display result is "off", the value of the normal map process flag is updated to "0".

The normal electric accessory opening pattern of the 239SGS357 is set when the normal electric accessory opening pattern is executed when the value of the normal figure process flag is “4”. Then, a process of repeatedly changing the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) into an open state and a closed state is executed by driving the solenoid 81 based on the set ordinary electric accessory opening pattern.

In this feature unit 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A), the normal electric accessory opening pattern of 1 is uniquely set based on the fact that the display result of the normal symbol is "hit". To. By setting the normal electric accessory opening pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) is placed in the open state for 2 seconds for 8 seconds three times and in the closed state for one second twice. Change.

Then, when the control of the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) based on the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern between the open state and the closed state is completed, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "0", which is normal. The processing is completed while the electric accessory is open.

By executing the normal symbol process processing as described above, in this feature unit 239SG, when the display result of the normal symbol is "hit", the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) is always opened and closed ( Control to open and closed states) is completed in 8 seconds.

Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends, while this feature In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the unit 239SG, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if a normal symbol hit occurs within the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, the game is played. The variable winning ball device 6B may be opened and closed until the second special symbol is variablely displayed after the state is controlled to the normal state. At this time, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B (the game ball is in a state where the first variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is started and the number of the second special symbol reserved memory becomes three. (Winning the variable winning ball device 6B), the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to five times after the game state is controlled to the normal state, and the second special after the time saving state ends. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display of the symbol becomes excessively high.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the last variable display of the time saving state is completed, so that the time saving state is the last. When the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the variable display of the second special symbol, if the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (normal symbol hit)", it must be during the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds, that is, , The opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed during the period in which the maximum number of the second special figure holding memories is four. That is, in the present feature unit 239SG, when the variable winning ball device 6B opens and closes during the symbol determination period immediately after the time saving control is completed, the second special figure is held even if the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B. Only up to 4 memories can be stored, and after the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol is started after the game state is controlled to the normal state, a new 2nd special symbol hold memory can be generated. Since the characteristics are extremely low, it is possible to prevent the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state from being excessively increased based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state as in the conventional pachinko gaming machine described above. There is.

Next, the control executed by the staging control CPU 120 will be described.

10-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a panel corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the second special symbol hold storage after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B. Panel display effect processing (239SGS361) for executing a panel display effect that suggests that the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit by displaying in 5, big hit A to big hit C when the gaming state is the normal state. The number of prize balls received from the CPU 103 between the time when the game state is controlled to one of the jackpot game states and the time when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the four variable displays are started (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive villa period). The number of times the notification command and the effect process flag are updated to the value corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot, etc., and the number of times the jackpot game state is controlled (the number of jackpots) and the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa period. The number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted (239SGS362), and the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls are displayed on the image display device 5. In order to update the background displayed on the result image display process (239SG363) 5 to the first background indicating that the gaming state is in the normal state and the second background image indicating that the gaming state is in the time saving state. Background image update process (239SGS364), variable display of the first second special symbol and variable display of the second and third second special symbols (second special symbol) in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. (Variable display based on the first hold memory and variable display based on the second hold memory) In order to execute the notification effect processing (239SGS365), when the effect mode described later is the second mode, the effect corresponding to the effect mode being the second mode is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. 2nd mode compatible staging process (239SGS366), based on receiving a V winning notification designation command from the CPU 103 during the small hit game, a V winning notification staging (based on the game ball passing through the third count switch 239SG024B). After executing the V winning notification effect processing (239SGS367) for executing the effect of notifying that the player is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game, any of the processes S170 to S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the panel display effect processing (239SGS363) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the panel display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-25, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the panel display effect execution flag indicating that the panel display effect is being executed is set (239SGS371). ..

When the panel display effect executing flag is not set (239SGS371; N), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is the first mode (239SGS372). In the feature unit 239SG, a first mode and a second mode are set in advance as the effect mode, and the first mode is a mode in which the panel display effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. Is. Further, in the second mode, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, it is notified that the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit by an effect different from the panel display effect (for example, by operating the push button 31B or the like). It is a mode in which production) can be executed. These effect modes can be selected by operating the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A by the player at the end of the jackpot game described later. When the effect mode is set to the second mode, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned second mode-compatible effect process (239SG366) to produce an effect different from the panel display effect (second mode-compatible effect). ) Should be executed.

When the effect mode is not the first mode (239SGS372; N), the panel display effect execution flag is terminated, while when the effect mode is the first mode (239SGS372; Y), the game state specification command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (239SGS373). Whether or not the game state designation command is received may be determined by whether or not the game state designation command reception flag is set.

If the game state designation command is not received (239SGS373; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game state designation command is received (239SGS373; Y), the jackpot type of the immediately preceding jackpot is specified and stored from the game status designation command (239SGS374). For example, if the received game state specification command is the second game state specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified as the jackpot A and stored, and if the received game state specification command is the third game state specification command, the command is stored. The immediately preceding jackpot type is specified and stored as jackpot B, and when the received game state specification command is the fourth game state specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified and stored as jackpot C, and the received game status specification is specified. If the command is the 5th game state specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified and stored as the jackpot D, and if the received game status specification command is the 6th game status specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is the jackpot E. Specific and memorize.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in the process of 239SGS374 is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375). When the specified jackpot type is any of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS375; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375; Y), the panel display effect executing flag is set (239SGS376), and the display of the panel display screen is started on the image display device 5. Then (239SGS377), the panel display effect processing is terminated.

When the panel display effect executing flag is set (239SGS371; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A239SG194A indicates that the determination has been completed. It is determined whether or not 1 is set (239SGS379).

If 1 is not set in the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS379; N), the start winning command buffer 239SG194A is checked (239SGS380), and the buffer number 2-0 is set. It is determined whether or not the entry has a memory of the symbol designation command (239SGS381). When the symbol designation command is not stored in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 (239SGS381; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the entry of the buffer number 2-0 has a memory of the symbol designation command (239SGS381; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in 239SGS374 is jackpot B (239SGS382).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS382; N), the display pattern of the variable display corresponding panel is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 (239SGS383). In the processing of 239SGS383, the display pattern of the corresponding panel is changed according to whether the symbol specification command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. Determined in different proportions from 1 to pattern PN-4.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the symbol designation command indicates a big hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 0%. Then, the pattern PN-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, the pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the symbol specification command indicates a small hit, the display pattern of the panel corresponding to variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 20% and pattern PN-2 at a rate of 30%. , 50% to pattern PN-3 and 10% to pattern PN-4. Then, when the symbol designation command indicates an error, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 55%, and to pattern PN-2 at a rate of 34%. The pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the pattern PN-1 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character A on the image display device 5, and the pattern PN-2 is the character B on the image display device 5. The pattern PN-3 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character C on the image display device 5, and the pattern PN-4 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character D on the image display device 5. It is a display pattern to be displayed.

That is, in this feature unit 239SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the corresponding panel during variable display, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is set to be the highest. When the character C is displayed on the display device 5, the jackpot expectation is set to be the second highest after the character D is displayed, and when the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is set low (expected jackpot for each character displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display: character D> character C> character B> character A).

Returning to FIG. 10-25, after the execution of 239SGS383, the effect control CPU 120 sets 1 to the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 (239SGS384), and the panel corresponding to the variable display of the determined display pattern. After starting the display on the image display device 5 (239SGS385), the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS382; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (239SGS386), and the jackpot B is set to the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. After starting the display of the corresponding character D-compatible panel on the image display device 5 (239SGS387), the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

Further, when 1 is set in the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS379; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in 239SGS374 is jackpot B (239SGS388). ). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS388; Y), the process proceeds directly to 239SGS395, while if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (239SGS388; N), the start winning command buffer 239SG194A is checked (239SGS389). ), It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command is stored in any of the entries corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (239SGS390). If there is no entry for the second special figure hold storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS395 as it is. On the other hand, when there is an entry for the second special figure hold storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; Y), "1" indicating that the decision has been made is set in the panel pattern determined flag of the entry. Whether or not it is determined (239SGS391).

If the panel pattern determined flag is set (239SGS391; Y), the process proceeds to 239SGS395 as it is. On the other hand, when the panel pattern determined flag is not set (239SGS391; N), the display pattern of the second special figure hold storage compatible panel is determined based on the symbol specification command stored in the entry (239SGS392). ), Set the panel pattern determined flag of the entry to 1 (239SGS393). Then, the display of the second special figure reservation storage corresponding panel in the display pattern determined in the process of the 239SGS393 is started (239SGS394), and the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

In the processing of 239SGS392, the display pattern of the panel corresponding to the holding storage of the second special figure may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-26 (A) (the same ratio as the processing of 239SGS383). In the processing of 239SGS383 and the processing of 239SGS392, the display pattern of the panel corresponding to variable display and the display pattern of the panel corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage may be determined at different ratios.

In 239SGS395, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set at the start of the variable display during execution is checked (239SGS395). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the panel display effect (239 SGS396), and if it is not the end timing (239SGS396; N), the panel display effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is the end timing (239SGS396; Y), the display of the panel display screen and the display of each panel on the image display device 5 are ended (239SGS397), and the panel display effect executing flag is cleared (). 239SGS398), the panel display effect executing flag is terminated.

FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the result image display process (239SGS365) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the result image display process shown in FIGS. 10-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect mode is set to the first mode (239SGS400). When the effect mode is the second mode (239 SGS400; N), the result image display process is terminated, and when the effect mode is the first mode (239 SGS400; Y), whether or not the result image display timer is operating. (239SGS401).

When the result image display timer is not operating (239SGS401; N), it is determined whether or not the effect control process flag is 3, that is, whether or not the special figure hit wait process (S173) is being executed. (239SGS402).

If the staging control process flag is not 3 (239SGS402; N), the result image display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect control process flag is 3 (239 SGS402; Y), the jackpot type stored in the process of 239 SGS374 of the panel display effect process is further referred to, and the jackpot type (immediately before being specified from the game control command) is referred to. It is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot game) is jackpot D or jackpot E (239SGS403).

When the jackpot type of the jackpot game immediately before being specified from the game control command is any of jackpot A to jackpot C (239SGS403; N), the result image display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game immediately before specified from the game control command is jackpot D or jackpot E (239SGS403; Y), the remaining second special figure time reduction notification command received immediately before is referred to (remaining). (Specify the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction number indicated by the 2nd special figure time reduction number notification command), and whether or not the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction number is 0 or 92, that is, the timing is the 2nd special in the time reduction state. It is determined whether or not it is the timing when the seventh variable display of the symbol is completed (239SGS404).

Then, when the number of remaining second special figure time reductions is not 0 or 92 (239SGS404; N), the result image display processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining second special figure time reduction number is 0 or 92 (239SGS404; Y), a value corresponding to the time of 19.5 seconds is set in the result image display period timer and the timer count (timer operation). (239SGS405), the number of big hits and the number of winning prize balls counted by the number of big hits / winning prize balls counting process, that is, the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state during the above-mentioned consecutive villa period and the consecutive villa period The display of the result image including the number of prize balls paid out is started (239SGS406), and the result image display process is completed.

The 19.5 seconds set in the result image display period timer in the 239SGS405 are the 7th variable display symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed. A maximum of four variable display periods (2 seconds x 4) of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state, and a symbol confirmation period (0.5) of three variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state. It is a period based on the sum of seconds x 3).

When the result image display timer is operating (239SGS401; Y), after the result image display period timer is decremented and updated by 1 (239SGS407), whether or not the result image display timer after the subtraction update is timered out. (239SGS408).

When the result image display timer is not timer-out (239SGS408; N), the result image display is continued by ending the result image display process, while the result image display timer is timer-out. At (239SGS408; Y), the display of the result image is terminated (239SGS409), and the result image display processing is terminated.

That is, in this feature unit 239SG, the variable display result does not become a small hit or a big hit in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E ends (V prize does not occur even if it becomes a small hit), and the time saving state is When finished, the result image is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the time saving state of the jackpot E, the result image is displayed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed seven times even in the time saving state.

10-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the background image update process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the background image update process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the game state by the value of the remaining second special figure time reduction number of times, the value of the effect control process flag, and the like (239SGS411).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (239SGS412).

In the case of either the big hit game state or the small hit game state (239SGS412; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while in the case of neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state (239SGS412; N). Further, it is determined whether or not it is in a normal state in which the time saving control is not performed (239SGS413).

When the specified gaming state is the normal state (239SGS413; Y), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (239SGS413a). Whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed may be determined by, for example, whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. .. When the second special symbol is being variably displayed (239SGS413a; Y), the background image update process is completed, and when the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (239SGS413a; N), the hold storage of the second special symbol is stored. It is determined whether or not there is (239SGS413b). Whether or not there is a hold storage of the second special symbol may be determined by whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-1 of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A.

When there is a hold memory of the second special symbol (239SGS413b; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and when there is no hold memory of the second special symbol (239SGS413b; N), the first background image is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is inside (239SGS414). When the first background image is being displayed (239SGS414; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while when the first background image is not being displayed (239SGS414; N), the background image is used as the first background. After the update is displayed on the image (239SGS415), the background image update process is terminated. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when the specified gaming state is not the normal state (239SGS413; N), it is determined whether or not the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether or not the variable display during effect process is being executed (). 239SGS416).

When the effect control process flag is 2 (239SGS416; Y), the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction notification command received immediately before is referred to (the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction notification command indicated by the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction notification command). (Specify the number of time reductions), and determine whether or not the remaining number of time reductions in the second special figure is 88 (239SGS417).

When the remaining number of times of the second special figure time reduction is not 88 times (239SGS417; N), the background image update process is completed, and when the number of times of the remaining second special figure time reduction is 88 times (239SGS417; Y), it is being executed. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display of is PA3-3, that is, whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is 15 seconds (239SGS418). When the variation pattern of the variable display during execution is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), the background image update process is completed, and when the variation pattern of the variable display during execution is PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), the background image update process is completed. Further, the control content of the process data of the variable display being executed is specified (239SGS419), and it is determined whether or not it is the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420). If it is the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420; Y), the background image is updated to the first background image and the background image update process is terminated (239SGS421).

On the other hand, if it is not the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420; N), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422), and if it is the update timing to the second background image. (239SGS422; Y), the background image is updated to the second background image, and the background image update process is completed (239SGS423). If it is not the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422; N), the background image update process is terminated.

When the staging control process flag is not 2 (239SGS416; N), when the remaining second special figure time reduction number is not 88 times (239SGS417; N), and when the fluctuation pattern is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; N). , It is determined whether or not the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422). Then, when the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while when the second background image is not being displayed (239SGS422; N), the background image is displayed. 2 After updating to the background image (239SGS423), the background image update process is terminated.

By executing the background image update process in this way, when the game state is the normal state, the image is displayed if the second special symbol is not in the variable display and there is no hold memory of the second special symbol. The first background image is displayed on the device 5, and the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times, the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is performed 7 times in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed. The result image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the case of execution. Then, when the eighth variable display of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state, the background image is once updated from the second background image to the first background image in the image display device 5, and then changed to the second background image again. Will be updated.

10-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command has been received (239SGS431). .. When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS431; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A are set. The various command data stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS432). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS431; N), whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, the second variable display start command is received. It is determined whether or not it has been done (239SGS433). When the second variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS433; Y), the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS434). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS433; N), the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing 239SGS432 or 239SGS434, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (239SGS435), and stops the decorative symbol according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. (239SGS436).

Further, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal state (239SGS437). Whether or not the game state is the normal state may be determined based on whether or not the second special figure time reduction notification command has been received. When the gaming state is the normal state (239SGS437; Y), the advance notice effect determination process (239SGS438) that determines the execution of the advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display is executed to 239 SGS439. If the game state is the time saving state (2309SGS437; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS439 without executing the process of 239SGS438.

The staging control CPU 120 in the 239SGS439 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach out-of-reach PA3-3 with a special figure variation time of 15 seconds based on the variation pattern specification command read in the 239SGS435. do. When the variation pattern of the variable display is not PA3-3 (239SGS439; N), the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 having a special figure variation time of 50 seconds. It is determined whether or not it is (239SGS440).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (239SGS440; Y), whether or not the game state is the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A. (239SGS441). Whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed may be determined by the jackpot type stored in the 2390SGS374 of the panel display effect processing. When the game state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed (239SGS441; Y), the variable display number of the second special symbol controlled by these fluctuation patterns and the time saving state is one. Select the process table (process table for panel display effect) and proceed to 239SGS448 (239SGS442).

On the other hand, when the game state is not the time saving state after the big hit game of the jackpot A ends (239SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B ends (239SGS443). ). Whether or not the game state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed may be determined by the jackpot type stored in the 2390 SGS374 of the panel display effect processing. When the game state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed (239SGS443; Y), the variable display number of the second special symbol controlled by these fluctuation patterns and the time saving state is 3 times. Select the process table and proceed to 239SGS448 (239SGS444).

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA3-3 in 239SGS439, the process table corresponding to the variable display number of the second special symbol controlled to the fluctuation pattern and the time saving state is 99 times (the time saving state during the variable display). A process table for V stock notification effect that notifies that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit (V stock (V prize) occurs) in any of the variable display of the second special symbol controlled by Select and proceed to 239SGS448 (239SGS447).

Even when the V-stock notification effect is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol 99 times (more accurately, the 92nd time after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times). There is a very small probability that the variable display result will be out of alignment in all of the (2 variable display of special symbols). Therefore, in the processing of 239SGS447, instead of selecting the process table for the V stock notification effect, an effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in either of the variable display of the second special symbol is produced. You may want to select a process table to run.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 in the processing of 239SGS440 (239SGS440; N), after the jackpot game of any one of jackpot C to jackpot E is completed in the processing of 239SGS443. In the case of the time saving state (239SGS443; N), the process table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to 239SGS448.

In the 239SGS448, the staging control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data of the above, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as staging parts, speakers 8L and 8R as staging parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (239SGS449). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 239SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (239SGS450). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (239SGS451). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the staging control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the staging process (S172) during variable display (239SGS452).

In the variable display effect processing, the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, the control of the staging device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative symbol is realized according to the value of the variable display control timer as described above, and the decorative symbol is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. The variable display of is stopped, and the value of the effect control process flag may be set to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (S173).

By executing each process by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-30, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. In this case, when the 7th variable display of the second special symbol is completed and the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is performed after the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds, respectively. It is executed four times with a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds in between. In addition, 19.5 over the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds, the variable display period of the second special symbol for 2 seconds each for 4 times, and the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds each is completed. In seconds, the result image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed up to four times after the game state is controlled to the normal state, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes from the second background image to the first background image. Will be updated. After that, as a normal state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-31, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed seven times. When is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed three times with a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds after the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds while the game state is maintained in the time saving state. To. In addition, these 10 seconds symbol confirmation period and 3 times each 2 seconds variable display period (8th to 10th variable display period of the 2nd special symbol after being controlled to the time saving state) and each The symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds, and the 0.5 seconds after the start of the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after being controlled to the time saving state. In 19.5 seconds, the result image is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the 11th variable display after the game state is controlled to the time saving state, if the variable display result is out of order, the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display by the variable pattern PA3-3) is executed for 15 seconds. To. During the variable display, the display of the result image displayed on the image display device 5 is terminated when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display, and the background image is changed from the second background image to the first. Update to the background image once. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is updated from the first background image to the second background image again, and the second special symbol, which is controlled to shorten the time during the variable display, is variable. The V stock notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit (V stock (V winning) occurs) in any of the displays is started.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, in the feature unit 239SG, the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D and the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E are completed are the 7th times. 2 After the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the same effect (display of the result image in the image display device 5 and update of the background image from the second background image to the first background image) is executed. Then, the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D ends by executing the variable display of the second special symbol seven times (the game state is controlled to the normal state), whereas the big hit E After the jackpot game is completed, the V-stock notification effect is executed even after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, and the time saving state continues.

Further, since the number of rounds of the jackpot D and the jackpot E in the feature unit 239SG is set to be the same, the player can use the type of the jackpot game executed by the V prize during the small hit game (the jackpot game state of the jackpot D). It is difficult to determine the jackpot game state of the jackpot E (see FIG. 10-6 (E)).

Therefore, in the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot D or the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot E is completed, is the time saving control continuously executed after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is.

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-29. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (239SGS461). Then, based on the specified variable display result and the variable pattern, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined (239SGS462).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, and the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the notice effect in, 40% decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-2, 15% decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-3, 5% The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is decided at the ratio of.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach (when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 49%, and the pattern is at a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the notice effect in YE-1, decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is decided at a rate of 1%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach (when the normal reach is out of alignment), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 80%, and the pattern YE- is performed at a rate of 15%. The execution of the notice effect in 1 is decided, the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-2 is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-3 is decided at a rate of 0%, and 0 The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is decided at a rate of%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (non-reach is out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and the pattern is at a rate of 5%. Decided to execute the notice effect in YE-1, decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, and decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%. , The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is decided at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-33 (B), in the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed as lines on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2. Is an effect pattern in which the characters "hot!" Are displayed as lines on the image display device 5, and pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the characters "super hot!" Are displayed on the image display device 5 as lines. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern in which the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the dialogue.

That is, as the advance notice effect in the feature unit 239SG, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 is set to be high, and the image display device 5 is set. In the case where "super hot!" Is displayed as a dialogue, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is set to be high next to the case where the character D is displayed. When "chance!" Is displayed as dialogue on the image display device 5, the ratio of the most variable display result being a big hit is set to be the lowest (the dialogue and characters displayed on the image display device 5 as a warning effect). Big hit expectation: Character D> "Super hot!"> "Hot!"> "Chance!").

That is, in the advance notice effect of the feature unit 239SG, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot expectation is the highest by displaying the character D on the image display device 5 as in the case of executing the panel display effect. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIG. 10-32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the process of the 239 SGS462 (239 SGS463). When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect (239 SGS463; Y), the effect pattern of the determined advance notice effect is stored (239 SGS464), and the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (239SGS467). ..

The advance notice effect is determined based on the fact that the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer is decremented by -1 each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is timered out. The process table for the advance notice effect is selected according to the effect pattern of the advance notice effect, and the process timer for the advance notice effect is started. After that, the value of the advance notice effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the image display device 5 changes according to the content of the process data according to the value of the advance notice effect process timer. A command may be output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the pattern.

10-34 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect processing shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is operating (239SGS461). When the ending effect process timer is not operating (239SGS461; N), the ending effect process table is selected (239SGS462) and the ending effect process timer is started (239SGS463). Then, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), the staging device (image display device 5 as a staging component, staging component). The ending effect processing is completed by controlling the various lamps, the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (239SGS464).

When the ending effect process timer is operating (239SGS461; Y), the value of the ending effect process timer is decremented by -1 (239SGS465), and it is determined whether or not the ending effect process timer has timed out. (239SGS466). When the ending effect process timer is timer-out (239SGS466; Y), it is further determined whether or not the timer-out ending effect process timer is the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467). When the timer-out ending effect process timer is not the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467; N), the process data is switched (239SGS468). That is, the ending effect process timer is started again by setting the ending effect process timer setting value set next in the ending effect process table to the process timer (239SGS469). In addition, the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data, input control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next. The control state for is changed (239SGS470), and the process proceeds to 239SGS472.

When the ending effect process timer is not timer-out in 239 SGS466 (239SGS466; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the circle-day group effect process timer (239SGS471), and the 239SGS472 is set to 239SGS472. move on.

In the 239SGS472, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the completed jackpot game is a jackpot A or jackpot B jackpot game (239SGS472). When the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of any of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS472; N), the ending effect processing is finished, and when the finished jackpot game is a jackpot A or jackpot B jackpot game ( In 239SGS472; Y), as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (A) and 10-35 (B), a message indicating that the effect mode can be changed in the image display device 5 during the ending effect is displayed, and a message is displayed. The effect mode determination process for accepting the operations of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A and determining the effect mode from the first mode and the second mode is executed (239SGS473).

When the ending effect process timer that has been timered out in 239SGS467 is the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467; Y), it is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process for the effect control process flag. (239SGS474), the ending effect processing is completed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when the feature unit 239SG is controlled to shorten the time after the end of the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-36 to 10-38. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) and 10-36 (B), when the first mode is selected as the effect mode, the player is asked after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed. An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by launching the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a hit with a normal figure and prompt the second start winning opening to win the game ball. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the game ball winning the second start winning opening, the display of the panel display screen is started on the image display device 5. At this time, the first panel displayed as the panel display effect is a character corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (C), when the game ball further wins in the second start winning opening, the display of the character panel corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the characters (panels) displayed according to each hold memory of the second special symbol are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-26 (A) regardless of the order of the hold memory generated. The character (panel) displayed according to each hold storage of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and may be different depending on the order of the generated hold storage. For example, the ratio at which the pattern PN-4 is determined as the display pattern of the panel when the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol is targeted (character D is targeted for the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol). The rate at which the panel is displayed) is set higher than the rate at which the pattern PN-4 is determined as the display pattern of the panel when the first to third hold storages of the second special symbol are targeted. As a result, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the fourth variable display of the second special symbol.

Then, when a maximum of five panels are displayed on the image display device 5 by winning a plurality of game balls in the second start winning opening, it is shown in FIGS. 10-36 (D) to 10-36 (F). As described above, the display of the panel display screen and each panel is completed, and the decorative design reaches the reach. Then, the reach production is started.

In the reach effect, for example, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight is executed. If the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (G), it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as a result of the battle effect. To. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (H), the variable display result is a small hit when the ally character wins the enemy character as a result of the battle effect. It is notified that it is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 10-36 (G), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable display ends, the variable display of the second special symbol for the reserved memory (up to 4 times) is shown. The reach effect is executed in the same manner as in 10-36 (E) to 10-36 (H).

If the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit in any of the maximum of 5 variable displays of the second special symbol, the game is controlled to be in a big hit game state of either big hit C to big hit E. (If the variable display result is a small hit, the condition is that a V prize is generated during the small hit game).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) and 10-37 (B), when the first mode is selected as the effect mode, the player is asked after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed. An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by launching the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a hit with a normal figure and prompt the second start winning opening to win the game ball. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the game ball winning the second start winning opening, the jackpot A corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed in the image display device 5. Panel display in the time-saving state after the big hit game of

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) and 10-37 (D), when the display of the character D-corresponding panel ends after the lapse of a predetermined time, the decorative symbol reaches. After the decorative symbol reaches the reach, the image display device 5 displays the variable display, the variable display based on the first hold memory of the second special symbol, and the second hold of the second special symbol as a success / failure notification effect. The operation promotion image of the push button 31B corresponding to each of the variable display based on the memory is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image of the push button 31B is displayed, the variable display, the variable display based on the first hold memory of the second special symbol, If any of the variable display results of the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is out of order, as shown in FIG. It is notified that all the variable display results of the display are out of alignment.

At this time, the image display device 5 again launches the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a hit with a normal figure and urge the player to win the game ball at the second start winning opening. The promotion image is displayed. Then, after all the three variable displays of the second special symbol controlled in the time saving state are completed, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (F), the game ball wins the second start winning opening. The panel display effect may be executed for the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage of up to four second special symbols that have been generated. As the panel display effect in this case, a panel (for example, a cross mark on the character D) indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the panel of the character D as the first panel has already been completed three times. By displaying the panel with the mark), the player may be made to pay more attention to whether or not the remaining variable display result of the second special drawing of the second special figure is a small hit or a big hit.

On the other hand, when the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image of the push button 31B shown in FIG. 10-37 (C) is displayed, the variable display, 1 of the second special symbol If the variable display result of either the variable display based on the second reserved memory or the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is a small hit or a large hit, it is shown in FIG. 10-37 (G). As a result of the hit / fail notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit in any of these three variable displays.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (A), after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E is completed, the game ball is launched to the player toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal figure hit. An operation promotion image prompting the second start winning opening to win a game ball is displayed on the image display device 5. In the time-saving state, the image display device 5 displays a second background image (for example, the night background image shown in FIG. 10-38 (B)) indicating that the game state is the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (B) and 10-38 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed seven times, the image display device extends for 19.5 seconds. The result image is displayed in 5. When the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol is the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D ends, that is, the variable display of the 7th second special symbol ends. As a result, when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (C) and 10-38 (D), the result image and the second background image are displayed in the image display device 5. Is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times. Then, the fourth variable display of the second special symbol after the game state is controlled to the normal state is completed (the maximum of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol after the jackpot D jackpot game is completed). The display of the result image on the image display device 5 is completed, and the second background image is updated to the first background image.

On the other hand, when the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol is the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, that is, the variable display of the 7th second special symbol. If the gaming state continues in the time-saving state even after the end of the process, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (D) and 10-38 (E), the result image and the second background image are displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed, the third variable display of the second special symbol (the eighth to tenth variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (F), when the eleventh variable display of the second special symbol is started after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed, the display of the result image is finished and the second background is displayed. The image is updated to the first background image. Further, after the background image is updated to the first background image, the V stock notification effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the background image is updated to the second background image again. The V-stock notification effect executed by the feature unit 239SG is an effect having the same aspect as the V-winning notification effect described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-stock notification effect is V. A part of the effect mode may be different from the winning notification effect (for example, the displayed character, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the LED light emission pattern, and the like may be different).

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (C) and 10-37 (B), one second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A In the time-saving state for variable display, the panels of characters A to C can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display effect, while the second special symbol three times after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. In the time-saving state for the variable display of, the image display device 5 can display the panel of the character D (the panel corresponding to the character D for the time-saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed). That is, since the panel of the character displayed as the panel display effect differs depending on the number of variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, it is possible to improve the interest in the time saving state.

In this feature unit 239SG, the panels of characters A to D can be displayed as a panel display effect in a time-saving state for one variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel display is used in a time-saving state for one variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A. The panel of only characters A to C can be displayed as an effect, and the panel of character D as a panel display effect is displayed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is targeted three times after the big hit game of big hit B is completed. It may be possible.

Further, in this feature unit 239SG, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, it is controlled to the big hit game state of the big hit B without being controlled to the small hit game state, and the big hit of the big hit B is controlled. In the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the game, the image display device 5 displays the character D compatible panel according to the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, so that it is variable. When the display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, it is possible to improve the interest of the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (C), in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, the image display device 5 can display the panels of characters A to D as a panel display effect, and the panel can be displayed. When the character D is displayed as the display effect, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit is set higher than that when the characters A to C are displayed, so that the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed. By displaying the panel of the character D as the panel display effect in the above, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode determination process during the ending effect of the jackpot A or the jackpot B after the end of the jackpot game, so that the effect mode is set to the first effect mode by the player's operation. It becomes possible to select from a mode and a second mode. Then, when the effect mode is set to the first mode, the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state, while when the effect mode is set to the second mode, the second mode is supported in the time saving state. An effect (for example, an effect of notifying that the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit by operating the push button 31B or the like) is executed. That is, in the feature unit 239SG, the player can select the effect to be executed in the time saving state, so that the interest of the effect in the first mode and the second mode can be improved.

Further, in this feature unit 239SG, after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, it is controlled to the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol once, and after the big hit game of the big hit B is finished, the second special three times. The time is shortened for the variable display of the symbol. Then, in the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times, the variable display of the second special symbol three times (variable display of the second special symbol being executed as the first variable display). And the variable display based on the hold memory of the second special symbol generated during the variable display), the hit / fail notification effect is executed, and the variable display result is small in any of the three variable displays of the second special symbol. Since it is possible to notify that a hit or a big hit will occur, it is possible to further improve the interest in the time-saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed. It is possible.

In the success / failure notification effect of the feature unit 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (D), the push button 31B is operated three times for the variable display of the second special symbol three times. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention. The number of times the push button 31B is operated as a notification effect may be provided only once or only twice. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, the first push button 31B is notified that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. If the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the variable display based on the hold memory of the first second special symbol (the second variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state), the second push button 31B is used. Notifies that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit by the operation, and the variable display result in the variable display based on the hold memory of the second second special symbol (the third variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state) If is a big hit or a small hit, it is sufficient to notify that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit by the third operation of the push button 31B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29, 10-32, and 10-33, when the gaming state is the normal state, a warning effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display is executed. It is possible, and when the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the advance notice effect, it is more than when the lines such as "chance!", "Hot!", And "super hot!" Are displayed. Since the variable display result becomes a big hit at a high rate, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 not only in the panel display effect but also in the notice effect. Can be improved.

The feature unit 239SG exemplifies a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed during the variable display only when the game state is the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect is not limited to this. , Even when the game state is a time saving state, it may be possible to execute the game during the variable display.

Further, in this feature unit 239SG, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is executed, the game state is controlled to the normal state, but the big hit of the big hit E When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the game is completed, the V prize notification effect and the effect mode are displayed in the eleventh variable display of the second special symbol after being controlled to the time saving state. Since the same V-stock notification effect is executed, the time saving state is the time saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times, and the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the remaining second special symbol. Since the player can recognize that the probability of a small hit is extremely high (it is easy to be controlled by the big hit game state), the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B), the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) opens and closes for 8 seconds, while as shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), the time is shortened. Since the last variable display symbol confirmation period of the state is set to 10 seconds, which is the second period, a normal symbol hit occurs during the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, and the game ball. Even if it becomes possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening, the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed from the time when the game state is controlled to the normal state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed, and after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed. Since the 7th variable display symbol confirmation period of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state of is set to 10 seconds, which is the 2nd period, 7 after the end of the big hit game via the small hit game. When the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the player recognizes whether or not the time saving state has not yet ended (whether or not the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed). It is possible to prevent it from being done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-31, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, after executing the variable display of the second special symbol seven times, the second special symbol is held and stored. The 4th variable display of the 2nd special symbol corresponding to the number is executed, and after the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the 4th variable display of the 2nd special symbol (controlled to the time saving state) In the 11th variable display of the second special symbol), the second background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily updated to the first background image, and the background image is updated to the first background image. Since the V-stock notification effect is executed based on the elapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to notify the player that the game state has been once controlled to the normal state and that the time saving state is still continuing. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11, 10-12, 10-19 (B) and 10-20, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed. Is executed and the game state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times is executed with the special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds, while the time reduction after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed. After the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed in the state, the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed up to 4 times with the special symbol fluctuation time of 2 seconds, so that the special symbol fluctuation time is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the time saving state still continues after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, the feature unit 239SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the variable display result is a big hit at a rate of 1 in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, a pachinko machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention may be applied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, it is possible to execute both the advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed as a notice effect, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when an effect with a low expectation of a big hit is executed as a notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-44 as a modified example 239SG-1, the rear variable as an effect to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (for example, during the reach effect) in the variable display start process. Rear variable to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect during display The suggestion effect determination process during display and the front variable as the effect to be executed during the first half of the variable display (for example, during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach) The effect control CPU 120 executes the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the display suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 10-39 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-39, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display with reference to the start winning command buffer 239SG194A (239SGS501). The hold display flag is a flag for displaying the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory on the image display device 5, and is stored in association with each entry in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. .. In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 239SGS301 (239SG502).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 239SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is changed to the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 239SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-39, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 239SGS502 (239SGS503). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 239SGS502, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the 239SGS502 process, further. In the processing of the 239SGS502, it is determined whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (239SGS504).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 239SGS502, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (239SGS505).

As a staging pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 239SGS505, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (B), a total of three staging patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is a pattern AS-2. It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of the 239SGS505, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 applies the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. The pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 239SGS502, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (239SGS506). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (239SGS507).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 239SG 307, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In this modification 239SG-1, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 are set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 are set as high settings. Alternatively, the setting values 1 and 2 may be set to a low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

In the process of the above-mentioned 239SGS507, as shown in FIG. 10-42, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and 30 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 30%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present modification 239SG-1, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the setting value is set. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 10-43 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process during front variable display executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result of the variable display (239SGS511). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (239SGS512).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the presence or absence of the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect and the suggestion during the front variable display are based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (239 SGS513). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is decided, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (239SGS514). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate of 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of order, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When a timer effect is executed as an effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-43, after the execution of the effect control CPU 120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined (239 SGS515). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (239SGS516).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (239SGS517).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 239 SGS517, a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided as shown in FIG. 10-44 (C). .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 239SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. And decide on pattern CS-2 at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (239SGS518).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 239 SGS518, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect patterns CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is 25 seconds with the image of the character Y. (See FIG. 10-45 (C)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 239SGS518, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B), the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is a jackpot suggestion effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for which execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the modified example 239SG-1 of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion effect more than in the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

As described above, in the present modification 239SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the character is used as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It is supposed to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-46, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer each time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the determined rear variable display suggestion effect effect pattern is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

Further, in the feature unit 239SG, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, V is V after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times (during the variable display of the second special symbol of the eleventh time). Although the stock notification effect is executed and the player is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification example 239SG-2, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, for example, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (new). As a different effect from the V stock notification effect, a special notification is provided to notify that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, depending on the conditions such as the start winning prize being generated). The production may be feasible.

By doing so, when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is controlled, the same result image as when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is controlled is displayed. During the period, it is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed according to the occurrence of the start prize of the second special symbol, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, if the game ball does not win the variable winning ball device 6B while the result image is displayed on the image display device 5, the special notification effect is not executed. That is, since the player can select whether or not to execute the special notification effect, the range of selection of the game can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 239SG-2, a mode in which both the V stock notification effect and the special notification effect can be executed in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, only the special notification effect of the V stock notification effect and the special notification effect may be executed.

Further, in the present modification 239SG-2, a form in which a special notification effect can be executed according to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B during a period in which the result image is displayed on the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special notification effect may be executed in response to the game ball winning the variable winning ball device 6B at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the feature unit 239SG exemplifies a mode in which the panel display effect is executed in a time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot A or the jackpot B is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot A or the jackpot A or the jackpot is not limited to this. Even when the jackpot D or jackpot E is controlled to the jackpot game via the small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of B is completed, the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. You may. When the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E is executed in this way, the panel display effect is started from the last variable display in the time saving state, and the variable display and the game state are started. The panel display effect may be executed over a maximum of three variable displays of the second special symbol after the is controlled to the normal state. In particular, as the panel display effect, the panel in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed in the image display device 5 as in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed during the last variable display of the time saving state. A panel of character D having a size larger than the display effect (a panel corresponding to character D for a time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B) is displayed, and the variable display and the game state are controlled to the normal state before execution. By executing the pass / fail notification effect for the three variable displays of the second special symbol (holding memory of the three second special symbols), the character D compatible panel is displayed on the image display device 5 as the panel display effect. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit can be further increased.

(Explanation of feature section 175SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature unit 175SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-13. FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the variable display result and the variable pattern. 11-3 is a diagram showing a table for determining the advance notice effect in FIG. 11-3, and a diagram showing the content of the advance notice effect in FIG. 11-3. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect in FIGS. 11-4. 11-5 are diagrams in which (A) to (D) show the composition of the effects of super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2. 11-6 are diagrams (A) to (H) showing an example of the staging operation of the super reach α1. 11-7 are diagrams in which (A) to (H) show an example of the effect of super reach β2. 11-8 is a diagram in which (A) is a diagram comparing the effect contents of the first stage effect and the second stage effect, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display status of the dialogue. 11-9 is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing the contents of the reach title. 11-10 are diagrams in which (A) to (H) show an example of the staging operation of the pre-stage staging and the post-stage staging. 11-11 is a diagram in which (A) shows a change mode in the switching effect, (B) is a diagram comparing the notice effect and the switching effect, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display periods of the notice effect and the switching effect. Is. 11-12 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the switching effect in FIGS. 11-12. 11-13 are diagrams in which (I) to (L) show an example of an effect operation of the switching effect.

In the following, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature unit 239SG or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description is omitted by adding the same reference numerals, and the feature is characterized. The points different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in Part 239SG will be mainly described.

(Fluctuating pattern)
As shown in FIG. 11-1, among the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in the feature unit 175SG, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect (normal reach effect) is executed is super reach. It is set shorter than the super reach α1, α2 and the super reach β1, β2, which are the super reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach effect (super reach effect) is executed. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α1, α2 and super reach β1, β2 in this feature unit 175SG is executed, the super reach of super reach β1 and β2 The variable pattern in which the reach effect is executed is set to have a longer special figure variable display time than the variable pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach α1 and α2 is executed.

In this feature unit 175SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, super reach α1, and normal reach is set high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set. And in the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the feature unit 175SG. In this feature unit 175SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved storages, and the game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-2, when the variable display result is a big hit (non-time saving time), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table A is used. The fluctuation patterns are PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern). (Fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) are determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot (time saving), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-6 (non-reach jackpot variation) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Pattern) is decided.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. One of -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation) is determined.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3 or more, the deviation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss). One of PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 deviation) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation) is determined.

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-3. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern) is decided.

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 175SG, the special figure variable display time is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or more or the time is shortened. However, the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), so that the game is delayed. While preventing this, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 175SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds and is super. As a reach effect, it is a variable display in which a battle effect in which a friendly character A (see FIG. 11-4 (A)) and an enemy character (not shown) battle (confrontation) is executed. The variable display of the super reach α2 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and the ally character B (see FIG. 11-4 (B)) as a super reach effect. It is a variable display in which a battle effect between the player and the enemy character is executed. The variable display of the super reach β1 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and the ally character C (see FIG. 11-4 (C)) as a super reach effect. This is a variable display in which a battle effect between the player and the enemy character (not shown) is executed. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach effect, three ally characters A, B, C and enemy characters It is a variable display in which a battle effect with (not shown) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 175SG is set so that the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super The jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of reach α2, super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 175SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super Reach α1> Normal reach> Non-reach).

That is, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 175SG, the jackpot expectation is different depending on which of the ally characters A to C appears in the reach effect (the jackpot expectation of each ally character). Degree: Character C> Character B> Character A).

(Notice production)
In the feature unit 175SG, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the variable display in the advance notice effect determination process (see step 239SGS462 in FIG. 10-29). In the feature unit 175SG, in the advance notice effect determination process, only the step-up advance notice effect (also referred to as SU advance notice effect) in which the advance notice image changes stepwise is determined as described later. These notice effects are not limited to, and include other forms of notice effects other than the step-up notice effect, for example, a character notice in which the above-mentioned character appears, or a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. Etc. may be decided, and when deciding the advance notice effect of these different modes, the timing of starting the notice effect differs depending on the mode of the notice effect. , Different periods may be set according to the mode of the advance notice effect.

Then, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed are determined using the table for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-3 (A). ..

In the feature unit 175SG, the random number for determining the advance notice effect is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of the random number for determining the advance notice effect is 100, which is in the range of 1 to 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the random number for determining the advance notice effect is appropriately set. You just have to decide. Further, a random number counter for determining the advance notice effect for generating these random numbers for determining the advance notice effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for determining the advance notice effect is updated every time the timer is interrupted by the random number update process.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in the feature unit 175SG, as a notice effect, a notice effect A in which the character A appears (see FIG. 11-4 (A)) and a character after the character A appears. The notice effect B in which B appears (see FIG. 11-4 (B)) and the notice effect C in which character C (see FIG. 11-4 (C)) appears after the characters A and B appear are executed. It is possible.

In the notice effect type determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), for each of "notice effect non-execution", "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C". , When the variable display result is a big hit, when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, and when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, different judgment values are different from the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 11-3 (A). It is assigned to be.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, 10 judgment values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the notice effect, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "notice effect A". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and 40 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C". When the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, 10 judgment values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the notice effect, and 40 judgment values are assigned to the "notice effect A". Thirty determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and 20 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C". When the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the notice effect, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the "notice effect A". Six determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and four determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C".

By assigning the determination value in this way, when a big hit occurs in the variable display, the advance notice effect is more likely to be executed than when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. Further, in the case of a big hit, "notice effect C" is easily executed, in the case of out of reach, "notice effect A" is easy to be executed, and in the case of non-reach is out of reach, "non-execution" is determined. It's getting easier.

With such a setting, the expectation that the notice effect will be a big hit is higher when the notice effect is executed than when the notice effect is not executed. Further, in the advance notice effect, the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher when the advance notice effect C is executed than when the advance notice effects A and B are executed. That is, the advance notice effect is a suggestion effect that suggests that the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of a plurality of types of characters A to C are controlled to the jackpot game state by switching and displaying them.

The expectation (reliability) of each notice effect A to C is the probability that each notice effect is executed and becomes a big hit, the probability that each notice effect is executed and becomes a big hit, and each notice effect is executed. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of not being a big hit (the execution probability of each notice production).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any of the advance notice effects is determined, that is, whether or not any of "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C" is determined. If it is determined and none of the "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C" has been determined, that is, if "non-execution" is determined, the advance notice effect determination process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when any one of "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C" is determined, the determined type of advance notice effect is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the advance notice effect execution decision flag is set. After turning it on, the advance notice effect determination process ends.

(Super reach production composition)
Next, the effect configurations of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-13.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 175SG, not only the variable display of the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2 but also the predetermined timing in the variable display of the normal reach other than the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2 (for example, Before the reach display mode is set, after the reach display mode is set, etc.), the ally characters A to C and the enemy character (not shown) appear, and the ally characters A to C and the enemy character (not shown) play a game. It is possible to perform an effect (for example, a mini game), and depending on whether the ally character wins or loses the enemy character, it is suggested that the variable display result may be a "big hit", or a "big hit" or It may be notified that it has become "off".

In the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, in the normal reach effect before the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode or after the reach display mode, the ally characters A to C and the enemy character (not shown) The first half of the battle is performed, and without being settled, the shutter or blackout, which will be described later, is performed, and finally the second half of the battle is developed as a super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, which is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit display result and is in a big hit game state. As a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled, the normal reach effect is executed based on the variable display mode becoming the reach display mode, and then the super reach effect is executed by developing into the super reach. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed before the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to 11-5, the staging control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. When the predetermined time has elapsed since then, if it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, any one of the advance notice effects A to C is executed (see FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-7 (A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set as the reach display mode, and the normal reach effect is started (see FIGS. 11-6 (B) and 11-7 (B)).

In the normal reach effect, the first half of the battle in which the characters A to C and the enemy character battle, and the shutter effect and blackout that make it difficult to see the predetermined image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first half of the battle. The staging (special staging), the pre-stage effect (first information display effect) that is executed after the shutter effect and the blackout effect and displays the front line (first information), and the pre-stage effect (first information display effect) that is executed after the pre-stage effect and the front line (first information) The movable body 32 is executed after the latter stage effect (second information display effect) that displays the rear line (second information) different from the first information) and the latter stage effect, and the movable body 32 is moved from the upper origin position of the image display device 5. A movable body effect that drops (operates) to an effect position that overlaps with a substantially central position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 is executed.

Further, although it is not executed in the super reach α1 and α2, in the case of the super reach β1 and β2, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, each character) are used in the period after the first stage effect is finished and before the second stage effect is started. A switching effect (special effect) of switching and displaying the character images (character images corresponding to A to C) is executed.

In addition, in the feature unit 175SG, in the normal reach production of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, the first half of the battle effect, the shutter effect, the blackout effect (special effect), the first stage effect (first information display effect), and the second stage. An example is illustrated in which the second half of the battle production (super reach productions A to D), which will be described later, is executed after the production (second information display production) and the movable body production are executed, but the present invention is limited to this. As a super reach other than super reach α1, α2, β1, β2 (for example, super reach γ, etc.), for example, after performing the first half of the battle effect, shutter effect, blackout effect, first stage effect, second stage effect , It may be possible to execute the super reach γ or the like in which the second half of the battle effect (super reach effects A to D) is executed without executing the movable body effect. In this super reach γ, it may be possible to develop into a super reach production while the ally character is damaged in the first half of the battle production and remains in an inferior state. Furthermore, in the first half of the battle, the normal reach effect in which the ally character wins or loses is executed by the normal reach effect of the variable patterns PA2-1 and PB1-1 or the normal reach effect of the variable pattern PA2-1 and PB1-1. It may be possible.

(Notice production)
As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-7 (A), the advance notice effect is such that the variable display of the decorative symbol based on any of the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2 is started, and the decorative symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of the characters A to C corresponding to the determined effect type are displayed in the vicinity of the central decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a production. The advance notice effect A displays the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined time and ends, and the advance notice effect B displays the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined time and then displays the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B. The notice effect C displays the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined time, then switches to the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B and displays the character image 175SG002 for a predetermined time, and further corresponds to the character C. The character image is switched to 175SG003, displayed for a predetermined time, and then terminated.

In this way, the advance notice effects A to C are suggestive effects that suggest the types of characters appearing in the first half of the battle effect and the second half of the battle effect by switching and displaying a plurality of types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (suggestion images). , The jackpot expectation is set to increase as the number of characters to be switched and displayed increases (big hit expectation; notice staging C> notice staging B> notice staging A).

As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and 11 (C), from the start of the display of the character image 175SG001 of the character A to the end of the display, or until the display of the character image 175SG002 of the next character B is started. The display time tf of the character B is about 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of the display of the character image 175SG002 of the character B to the end of the display or the display of the character image 175SG003 of the next character C is started. Is about 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of displaying the character image 175SG003 of the character C to the end of the display is about 3000 ms, and the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of each of the characters A to C are set. The display times of are all the same. Further, the size of each character image 175SG001 is almost the same, and the display color is a display color peculiar to each character.

The display time tf from the start of displaying the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of one character to the start of displaying the character image of the next character is not limited to the above 3000 ms and can be changed in various ways. Is. Further, the display time tf may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tf of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a big hit when it appears, is set to the display time tf of another character image 175SG001 and the character image 175SG002. The display time may be set longer than tf.

(Direction of the first half of the battle)
In the first half of the battle, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (B) (C) and 11-7 (B), the variable display mode is the reach display mode, and the character image 175SG004 "reach!" Is displayed to reach the normal reach. It starts when the production starts. Specifically, the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the ally characters A to C and the character image 175SG005 of the enemy character appear and start the battle, and the shutter effect and the blackout effect described later are started without the battle being settled. It ends by being done. In other words, the result of the battle is carried over to the latter half of the battle, which will be described later.

(Shutter effect and blackout effect)
As shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the shutter effect is on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5 when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the super reach β1 and β2. After the shutter image 175SG006 imitating the shutter is displayed in a mode of reciprocating movement display in the left-right direction, the shutter image 175SG006 in a mode in which the left and right shutters are closed is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). This makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decorative pattern being executed, the character image 175SG001, 175SG005, etc., that is, it is difficult to recognize the first half of the battle being executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect, the display image (variable display image of the decorative pattern, character image 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by the shutter image 175SG006 is displayed. In addition to making it difficult to see and darkening the display screen, the volume of the staging sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered from the volume at the time of the staging in the first half of the battle, and further, the game area, the movable body 32, By lowering the amount of light of various light emitting means (for example, LEDs) provided on the glass door frame and the frame 3 for the game machine from the amount of light at the time of the first half of the battle production, it becomes difficult to recognize the first half of the battle production (for example, the first half of the battle production is difficult to recognize. (See FIG. 11-9 (A)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the shutter effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display area of the image display device 5 and reduces the volume and the amount of light is a predetermined time (for example, 3) after the shutter effect is started. It is designed to continue until the elapse of seconds or 5 seconds), and the shutter effect execution period ta2 in the super reach α2 is set to be longer than the shutter effect execution period ta1 in the super reach α1. Yes (ta1 <ta2).

In the blackout effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (C), when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the super reach β1 and β2, the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The black display state makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decorative pattern being executed, the character image 175SG001, 175SG005, etc., that is, it is an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the first half effect of the battle being executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the blackout effect, the display image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 according to the mode of the black screen (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.) ) Is difficult to see, the display screen is darkened, and the volume of the staging sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered from the volume at the time of the normal reach staging. , The first half of the battle effect is recognized by lowering the amount of the effect light of various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided on the glass door frame and the frame 3 for the game machine than the amount of the light amount at the time of the first half of the battle effect. Make it difficult (see FIG. 11-9 (A)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and reduces the volume and the amount of light starts the blackout effect. After that, it is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds or 9 seconds) elapses, and the execution period ta4 of the blackout effect in the super reach β2 is the blackout effect in the super reach β1. A time longer than the execution period ta3 is set (ta3 <ta4).

Since the execution periods ta3 and ta4 of the blackout effect are set to be longer than the execution periods ta1 and ta2 of the shutter effect, the longer the execution period of the shutter effect and the blackout effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit. (Ta1 = 3 seconds <ta2 = 5 seconds <ta3 = 7 seconds <ta4 = 9 seconds). Therefore, the player expects that the blackout effect is executed for a longer period of time than the shutter effect, so that the attention to the shutter effect and the blackout effect can be maintained. Further, in the execution periods ta3 and ta4 of the blackout effect, a precursor effect that announces that the first stage effect or the second stage effect will be started may be performed.

Further, as described above, in the method of darkening the display screen of the image display device 5, if the image display device 5 is a liquid crystal display device, the light emitted from the backlight toward the front is blocked by the liquid crystal layer. The blocking rate may be increased or the amount of light from the backlight may be decreased. Further, if the image display device 5 is an EL panel using organic electroluminescence (organic EL), the drive voltage may be lowered. That is, the display screen can be darkened (black screen display) by setting the light emission state to reduce the amount of light output from the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the display screen of the image display device 5 can be displayed. Decreasing the brightness (output level) means reducing the amount of light output from the display screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), in the feature unit 175SG, the output amount (output level) of the screen brightness, volume, and light amount of the image display device 5 is accompanied by the start of the shutter effect and the blackout effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output amount of at least one of the brightness, the volume, and the amount of light may be set to "0" (for example, black screen display, mute, turn off, etc.).

(First stage production and second stage production)
As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (E) and 11-7 (D), the first stage effect is after any of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 corresponding to the characters A to C appearing in the first half of the battle effect is displayed. The dialogue content spoken by the characters A to C is displayed as a character image 175SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the latter stage staging, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (F) and 11-7 (E), following the first stage staging, the dialogue content spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 175SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5. At the same time, it is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the dialogue content of the first stage production is based on the battle situation of the first half of the battle production (related to the first half of the battle production), and is considered to show the character's enthusiasm for the second half of the battle production. , The content of the dialogue in the latter part of the production is said to represent the special move to be performed in the latter half of the battle.

Specifically, in Super Reach α1, the dialogue of the first stage production is "It's hard to do ... I'll settle next!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Strong attack!". In Super Reach α2, the dialogue of the first stage production is said to be "The game is about to begin ... We will settle the matter next!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Super Attack!". In Super Reach β1, the dialogue of the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show you the real power!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Ultra Attack!". In Super Reach β2, the dialogue of the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show everyone's power!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Miracle Attack!".

In addition, the dialogue content of the first stage production and the second stage production is said to suggest that the victory expectation (big hit expectation) of the battle production is higher in the order of super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, and super reach α1. There is. In other words, the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show you everyone's power!", "I'm not alone ... I'll show you my true power!" , "It's hard to do ... I'll settle next!", The winning expectation (big hit expectation) is set higher, and the latter stage production is "Strong Attack!", "Super Attack!", "Ultra Attack!" , "Miracle Attack!", The winning expectation (big hit expectation) is set higher.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the lines of the first stage effect and the lines of the second stage effect are output separately. Further, the lines of the pre-stage staging include the first period th1 from the timing ti1 at which the pre-stage production was started to the timing ti2 at which the predetermined time has elapsed, and the second period th2 from the timing ti2 to the timing ti3 at which the predetermined time has elapsed. It is output (displayed and voiced) separately, and the dialogue of the latter stage production is the first predetermined period th3 from the timing ti4 when the latter stage production is started to the timing ti5 where the predetermined time has elapsed, and the predetermined time has elapsed from the timing ti5. The output (display and sound) is divided into the second predetermined period th4 up to the timing ti6.

The first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3, and the second predetermined period th4 all have the same length in the feature unit 175SG, but the length of each period varies arbitrarily. For example, the length is different between the execution period of the first stage effect (first period th1 + second period th2) and the execution period of the second stage effect (first predetermined period th3 + second predetermined period th4). May be good.

Further, although the first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 are exemplified as different periods, the present invention is not limited to these, and each period is not limited to this. A part of one of the periods and the other period may overlap. For example, the display of the character image 175SG007 of the second period th2 starts before the display of the character image 175SG007 of the first period th1 ends. May be done.

Specifically, in the dialogue of the first stage production of Super Reach α1, 9 characters of "It's hard to do ..." are output in the 1st period th1 and 9 characters of "I will settle next!" In the 2nd period th2. Is output. As for the dialogue of the first stage production of Super Reach α2, 9 characters of "The game is about to come ..." are output in the 1st period th1 and 9 characters of "Settle next!" Are output in the 2nd period th2. As for the dialogue of the first stage production of Super Reach β1, 7 characters of "I'm not alone ..." are output in the 1st period th1 and 11 characters of "I'll show you my true power!" Are output in the 2nd period th2. To. As for the dialogue of the first stage production of Super Reach β2, 7 characters of "I'm not alone ..." are output in the 1st period th1 and 12 characters of "I'll show everyone's power!" Are output in the 2nd period th2. ..

Further, in the dialogue of the latter stage production of the super reach α1, five characters of "strong" are output in the first period th1 and five characters of "attack!" Are output in the second period th2. In the dialogue of the latter stage of Super Reach α2, 4 characters of "Super" are output in the 1st period th1 and 9 characters of "Attack!" Are output in the 2nd period th2. In the dialogue of the latter stage of Super Reach β1, four characters of "Ultra" are output in the first period th1 and four characters of "Attack!" Are output in the second period th2. In the dialogue of the latter stage of Super Reach β2, the four characters of "Miracle" are output in the first period th1 and "Attack!" Is output in the second period th2.

In the case of Super Reach α1, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (9 characters) is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the second period th2. ) Is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of Super Reach α2, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (9 characters) is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the second period th2. ) Is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of Super Reach β1, the number of characters (7 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (11 characters) is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. The number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (11 characters). ) Is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of Super Reach β2, the number of characters (7 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (12 characters) is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters (7 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters (12 characters) displayed in the second period th2. ) Is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

As described above, in each superreach α1, α2, β1, β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters displayed is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th2 is displayed in the second predetermined period th4. More than the number of characters. Further, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and the second period th2 of the first stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 of the second stage effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the display mode of the dialogue in the front-stage staging is different from the display mode of the dialogue in the rear-stage staging. It is displayed in a display mode in which the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 and the character image 175SG003 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 175SG007 composed of a plurality of characters (for example, "not one person ...") is displayed in the first period th1. The character image 175SG007, which is displayed in a gradually increasing and brightening mode (fade-in) and then consists of a plurality of characters (for example, "I will show everyone's power!"), Is gradually increased in the second period th2. Moreover, it is displayed in a brightening mode (fade-in). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (C), the character image 175SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone ... I'll show you everyone's power!") Is the largest, and after it is displayed brightly, it gradually becomes smaller. In addition, it is displayed in a darkened mode (fade out) and eventually disappears. The character image 175SG007 may be moved while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 175SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", and "ru"). ) Is displayed (dynamically displayed) so as to move while rotating from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3 (frame-in), and a plurality of character images 175SG008 (1 character). For example, "a", "ta", "tsu", "ku", and "!") Are displayed (frame-in) so as to move while rotating from the bottom side to the center of the display screen in the second predetermined period th4 (frame-in). Dynamic display). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (G), after the character image 175SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") Is the largest and is displayed brightly, after moving so as to spread radially toward the surroundings. Finally, it is displayed in a mode (frame out) that disappears from the display screen.

The character images 175SG008 displayed in the second predetermined period th4 are all the same "attack!" Characters, but the colors and forms may be different according to the type of super reach.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the character image 175SG007 of the pre-stage effect is small, flat (two-dimensional), slow in movement (change speed of display mode due to fade-in), and displayed with low brightness. (See FIGS. 11-10 (A) to (C)). On the other hand, the character image 175SG008 of the latter stage effect is larger and three-dimensional (three-dimensional) than the character image 175SG007 of the first stage effect, and the movement (change speed (movement speed) of the display mode due to frame-in) is fast and has high brightness. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-10 (E) to (G)).

If the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG008 in the second stage production is larger than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG007 in the first stage production and it is brighter, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in is performed. The size and brightness of a part of the above may be reversed. Further, although the dialogue contents are different between the first stage production and the second stage production, at least a part of the contents may be common.

In this way, the larger the size of the character image that composes the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis, the more three-dimensional the form is, the higher the emphasis is, and the faster the movement is, the higher the emphasis is. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the emphasis is. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image in the latter stage staging are illustrated in a form in which the degree of emphasis is higher than that in the first stage staging, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage staging is not limited to this. It suffices that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image of is higher than that of the character image of the previous stage staging. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes those in which the thickness of characters is higher in thicker characters than in thinner characters, and in terms of color, those with higher saturation and lightness are higher. May be good. Further, not only the display mode of the character image itself but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to increase the degree of emphasis.

Further, in the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2, the execution periods tb1 to tb4 of the preceding stage effect are all set to the same time, but they may be different depending on the type of super reach. Further, although the execution periods tc1 to tc4 of the latter stage production are all set to be the same time, they may be different depending on the type of super reach.

(Switching production)
As shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, the switching effect is after the first stage effect and before the second stage effect or the second half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the super reach β1 and β2. This is an effect of switching and displaying character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C. Further, since the switching effect is executed in the super reach β1 and β2 and not in the super reach α1 and α2, by executing the switching effect, either the super reach effect C or the super reach effect D described later is executed. Is notified.

In the switching effect, the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A is first displayed, then the character image 175SG002 is switched to the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B, and then the character image 175SG003 corresponding to the character C is switched and displayed. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the switching effect is started after the first stage effect is completed, and the second stage effect is started after the switching effect is completed. The display time of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 in the switching effect is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and the display time of all the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is the same in the feature unit 175SG, but depending on the character type. It may be different. Further, the display time tg may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tg of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a big hit when it appears, is set to the display time tg of another character image 175SG001 and the character image 175SG002. The display time may be set longer than tg.

Further, at the start of displaying each of the characters A to C, a blank image 175SG010 (see FIGS. 11-12 (A), (E), and 11-13 (I)) different from the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is displayed. After that, each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is switched in a plurality of stages in the order of a small image, a medium image, and a large image so that each character A to C gradually expands from the back side to the front side of the display screen. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-12 (B) to (D), (F) to (H) and FIGS. 11-13 (J) to (L)). The display times tg of the small image, the medium image, and the large image of the blank image 175SG010 and each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are the same (for example, 250 ms), but the display time of each image may be different.

For small images and medium images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (see FIGS. 11-12 (B) to (C), (F) to (G) and FIGS. 11-13 (J) to (K)). , While displaying a golden line image, large images of the blank image 175SG010 and each character image 175SG001-175SG003 (FIGS. 11-12 (A), (D), (E), (H) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-12 (A), (D), (E), (H)). For I) and (L), a blue image is displayed. In this way, the blank image 175SG010 displayed at the start stage and the large image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 displayed at the end stage among the plurality of stages, and each character image 175SG001 displayed at the intermediate stage between the start stage and the end stage. By differentiating the display mode of the small image and the medium image of ~ 175SG003, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the character image is changed and the timing at which the character type is switched.

In the switching effect, the blank image 175SG010 and each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are specified in a state where the visibility of the small image, the medium image, and the large image is reduced (for example, each image is masked). An image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate image) is superimposed on the front side of each of the images (for example, a display layer for pseudo light guide plate effect which is a layer having a higher display priority than a normal display layer for displaying a normal effect image). It may be possible to execute a specific image effect (for example, a pseudo light guide plate effect) to be displayed. By doing so, for example, when comparing the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device arranged on the front side of the image display device 5 with the pseudo light guide plate effect, the pseudo light guide plate effect has an image different from the light guide plate effect. It is possible to perform a display similar to the light guide plate effect without deteriorating the visibility of the light guide plate. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the light guide plate in the pseudo light guide plate production, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 175SG, the blank image 175SG010 displayed at the start stage is common to all the characters A to C, but the blank image 175SG010 whose display mode is different for each character A to C may be displayed. good.

Further, although the small image and the medium image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold, they may be displayed in a color other than gold. Further, although the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 displayed at the end stage are displayed in blue, they may be displayed in a color other than blue.

Further, each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 exemplifies a form in which a small image, a medium image, and a large image are enlarged in three stages in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is two stages or less or four stages or more. It may be changed in stages. Further, the display mode such as the posture and facial expression of the characters A to C may be changed while enlarging, or the display mode and size may not be changed and only the display color may be changed. Further, for example, the character C (specific image) displayed at the end is switched and displayed one more step from FIG. 11-13 (L) so that the number of switching is larger than that of the characters A and B. Alternatively, the display time tg1 may be longer than the display time tg1 of the other characters A and B. Further, as the switching display pattern of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003, a plurality of types of switching display patterns are set, and one of the plurality of types of switching display patterns is determined for each character A to C, and the determined switching display is determined. The display may be performed based on the pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and 11 (C), the character types appearing in the switching effect are the same as the character types appearing in the advance notice effect, but at the intermediate stage and the end stage in the switching effect. The displayed character image is displayed larger than the character image displayed in the advance notice effect. Further, the character type appearing in the switching effect and the character type appearing in the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to be the same, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the switching effect, the display time tg1 from the start of displaying one of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 to the switching display to another character image is 1000 ms, whereas the notice effect Then, the display time tf1 from the start of the display of any of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 to the switching display to another character image is 3000 ms. Further, the display color of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is gold in the switching effect, whereas it is a normal color (for example, white) in the advance notice effect.

In this way, the period tg1 from the display of one character image in the switching effect to the switching display to another character image is switched to another character image after the one character image is displayed in the advance notice effect. The period until it is done is shorter than th1. That is, the switching effect is not executed in the super reach α1 and α2, but is performed in the super reach β1 and β2, which have a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach α1 and α2. By doing this quickly, it is possible to improve the expectation for a big hit.

In the feature unit 175SG, the display time tf1 of the character image in the advance notice effect and the display time tg1 of the character image in the switching effect are exemplified in a form in which the display time tg1 is shorter than the display time tf1 for all character types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the display time of at least one character image among a plurality of types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003, the display time tg1 in the switching effect is the display of the character image in the advance notice effect. It suffices if it is shorter than the time tf1. Further, as long as the display time tg1 in the switching effect is shorter than the display time tf1 of the character image in the advance notice effect, the display times tf1 and tg1 of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 may be different.

(Direction in the second half of the battle)
The second half of the battle production is executed after the movable body production is executed in the normal reach production, and then the reach title production that notifies the developing super reach type is performed, and finally the battle between the characters A to C and the enemy character. In the above, it is an effect of notifying whether or not the characters A to C win the enemy character. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect that the characters A to C win the enemy character and the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and when the variable display result is out of order, the character A is executed. The effect of notifying that ~ C is defeated by the enemy character and the variable display result is out of order is executed.

The content of the second half of the battle effect is not shown in detail, but it is said that the characters A to C perform the type of attack displayed in the latter stage effect on the enemy character. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), in the case of the super reach α1, the super reach effect A in which the ally character A attacks the “strong attack!” Displayed in the subsequent effect is executed, and the super reach α2 is executed. In the case of, the super reach effect B in which the ally character B attacks the "super attack!" Displayed in the latter stage effect is executed, and in the case of the super reach β1, the ally character C is displayed in the latter stage effect. Super reach production C that attacks "Ultra Attack!" Is executed, and in the case of Super Reach β2, three ally characters A to C are super that attacks "Miracle Attack!" Displayed in the latter stage production. Reach effect D is executed.

In addition, after the movable body production is completed and before any of the super reach effects A to D is started, the type of the super reach effects A to D to be executed and the victory expectation (big hit expectation) of the battle are notified. The reach title effect (see FIGS. 11-6 (H) and 11-7 (H)) is executed. Specifically, the character images 175SG020 showing the types of the super reach effects A to D, the images 175SG021 showing the winning expectation (big hit expectation) of the battle, and the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 showing the types of the characters performing the battle. , Is displayed. In the image 175SG021 showing the battle victory expectation (big hit expectation), the expectation is displayed according to the number of stars (for example, 5 stages from 1 to 5), and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. ..

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), the jackpot expectation of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2 is highest in super reach β2, and that of super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, and super reach α1. Since the jackpot expectations of Super Reach Productions A to D are set higher in order, Super Reach Production D has the highest degree of expectation, followed by Super Reach Production D, Super Reach Production C, Super Reach Production B, and Super Reach Production A. It is set.

Further, during the execution period from the start to the end of the reach title effect, the reach title A for notifying the execution of the super reach effect A is td1, the reach title B for notifying the execution of the super reach effect B is td2, and the super reach. The reach title C for notifying the execution of the effect C is td3, the reach title D for notifying the execution of the super reach effect D is td4, the period of td1 and td2 is the same, and the period of td3 and td4 is the same. be. Further, the execution periods td3 and td4 of the reach titles C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods td1 and td2 of the reach titles A and B corresponding to the super reach α1 and α2. (Td1 = td2 <td3 = td4).

In addition, the execution period from the start to the end of the super reach effect is te1 for the super reach effect A, te2 for the super reach effect B, te3 for the super reach effect C, and te4 for the super reach effect D. The period is the same as that of te2, and the period is the same as that of te3 and te4. Further, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach effects C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of the super reach effects A and B corresponding to the super reach α1 and α2. (Te1 = te2 <te3 = te4).

(Display screen, sound, light output level)
As described above, in the super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the first half of the battle production is started in the normal reach production, and after the shutter production or the blackout production makes it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle production, the first stage production and the switching production are performed. (Not Super Reach α1 and α2), the latter stage effect and the movable body effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), in the first half of the battle effect, the brightness (brightness) of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (sound of dialogue and effect sound), The brightness of each LED is set to an intermediate level (ML), but when it is difficult to recognize the first half of the battle effect due to the shutter effect or the blackout effect, the brightness of the display screen of the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L, The output sound from the 8R and the brightness of the various LEDs are reduced from the intermediate level (ML) to the lowest level (LL), respectively, so that the production becomes a quiet mode.

Next, when the first stage effect is started, the brightness of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the brightness level of various LEDs rise to a level slightly lower than the intermediate level (ML). In addition, the display, sound, and light output levels gradually increase during the execution period of the switching effect, and the display, sound, and light output levels increase to the highest level (HL) from the latter stage effect to the movable body effect. As a result, the production becomes a lively mode. After that, when it develops into super reach, each output level returns to the intermediate level (ML).

In the above, when the first half of the battle is executed, in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the battle is not carried over to the second half and the victory or defeat is achieved, while in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, the battle is carried over to the second half. It will be different. At this time, it becomes difficult to recognize the first half of the battle production that is being executed due to the shutter effect and the blackout effect. It is possible to make the production more exciting.

In this way, in the normal reach effect, the display, sound, and light output levels are lowered to the lowest level in response to the difficulty in recognizing the first half of the battle effect due to the shutter effect or blackout effect, and then with the passage of time. By gradually increasing the output level, the production is gradually raised, so that the player's expectation that any one of the super reach productions A to D will be executed can be gradually increased. ..

(Action effect)
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 175SG can be controlled to a big hit game state which is advantageous for the player, and the effect control CPU 120 has normal reach of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2. In the staging, a shutter staging, a blackout staging, a pre-stage staging that displays the first information composed of the first number of information (first information display staging), and a pre-stage staging can be executed after the first staging. It is possible to execute a subsequent stage effect (second information display effect) for displaying the second information composed of a second number of information different from the above, and emphasize the second information more than the display mode of the first information. It is possible to display in a display mode with a high degree, the first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed in the first stage effect, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displayed in the second stage effect. The number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and the second period th2 of the first stage staging is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 of the second stage effect.
According to this feature, the amount of information in the second information is smaller than that in the first information, and the information is emphasized and displayed. It can be improved step by step. More specifically, it is possible to display the information in a more emphasized manner by displaying the information with a small number of characters in a larger size than displaying the information with a large number of characters in a smaller size, so that the effect can be raised step by step.

In addition, an aspect when the display of the first information is finished in the first stage effect (for example, a fade-out mode) and an embodiment when the display of the second information is finished in the second information display effect (for example, a frame-out mode). ) Is different.
According to this feature, since the mode when the display is finished differs between the first information and the second information, the expectation that the first stage effect and the second stage effect are controlled to the big hit game state can be gradually improved. Can be done.

Further, the mode when the display of the first information is started in the first stage effect (for example, the fade-in mode) and the mode when the display of the second information is started in the second stage effect (for example, the frame-in mode) are different. different.
According to this feature, since the mode when the display is started differs between the first information and the second information, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation that the first-stage effect and the second-stage effect are controlled to an advantageous state. can.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 switches and displays the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C after the pre-stage effect and before starting the post-stage effect. It is feasible.
According to this feature, by executing the switching effect of switching and displaying the character image before shifting from the first stage effect to the second stage effect, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is gradually improved. Can be done.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super reach effects A to D, and can execute the reach title effects A to D as a notification effect notifying that the super reach effect is executed after the subsequent stage effect. .. According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation for the super reach effects A to D.

Further, the execution periods td1 to td4 of the reach title effect are shorter than the execution period tb1 of the first stage effect and the execution period ct1 of the second stage effect. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from becoming redundant while improving the expectation for the super reach effects A to D.

Further, the staging control CPU 120 sequentially directs the plurality of character images 175SG008 (for example, “mi”, “la”, “ku”, and “ru”) composed of one character from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by being able to display (dynamically display) so as to move while rotating (frame-in).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can gradually enhance the pre-stage effect and the post-stage effect by raising the output level of the display, sound, and light in the post-stage effect than in the pre-stage effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 175SG, the effect control CPU 120 has a normal reach effect in the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2, a shutter effect and a blackout effect, super reach effects A and B, and the super reach. It is possible to execute the super reach effects C and D, which suggest that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the effects A and B are executed, the switching effects, and the advance notice effects A to C. After starting the shutter effect and the blackout effect, the output levels of the display, sound, and light are lowered, and then the switching effect is executed in the case of super reach β1 and β2.
According to this feature, when the super reach effects C and D are executed, after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is difficult to see due to the blackout effect and the output of sound or light is suppressed, the character images A to By executing the switching effect of switching and displaying C, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Further, in the switching effect, the display period tg1 from the display of one character image to the switching and display of the other character image is the display period tg1 from the display of the one character image in the advance notice effects A to C to the other characters. The display period until the image is switched to display is shorter than tf1.
According to this feature, when the super reach effects C and D are executed, after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is difficult to see due to the blackout effect and the output of sound or light is suppressed, the advance notice effects A to By executing the switching effect of switching and displaying the character image faster than C, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can switch and display a character image larger than the character images in the advance notice effects A to C in the switching effect. According to this feature, by executing the switching effect of switching and displaying the character image larger than the notice effects A to C, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state. ..

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect that reduces the sound output in the first period and a blackout effect that reduces the sound output in the second period, which is longer than the first period, and can perform super reach. Perform a blackout effect before the effect is performed.
According to this feature, there are cases where the predetermined image is difficult to see due to the blackout effect and the sound and light output are suppressed for a short period and a long period, so that there is a sense of expectation that the predetermined image will be controlled to the jackpot game state. Can be suitably improved.

In addition, the super reach β1 and β2 in which the blackout effect is executed have a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach α1 and α2 in which the shutter effect is executed, so that the output of sound and light is suppressed during the period. It can be noticed.

Further, the plurality of types of specific images in the switching effect include at least a first specific image and a second specific image having an aspect similar to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image. FIG. 11-. (Refer to 13 (I) to (L)), one character image is changed by switching and displaying, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

Further, the blank image 175SG010 and the large image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in blue, and the small image and the medium image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold, so that the character image changes and types. It becomes easier to understand the switching of.

Further, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach effects C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of the super reach effects A and B corresponding to the super reach α1 and α2. By doing so (te1 = te2 <te3 = te4), it is possible to prevent the super reach effects A and B from becoming redundant even though the switching effect is not executed.

(Characteristic part 175SG deformation example 1)
Next, the feature portion 175SG modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. 11-14 is a timing chart showing an example of the super reach effect in the feature portion 175SG modification 1 in FIGS. 11-14.

In the above-described embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels in the normal reach effect in the super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 are gradually increased at a plurality of timings as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-14 (A), for at least one output level of display, sound, and light (for example, display and sound). In the period from the start of the first stage effect to the end of the second stage effect, the sound may be gradually increased. In addition, the display, sound, and light output levels do not necessarily have to rise to the highest level in the subsequent production.

Further, during the period from the start of the shutter effect or the blackout effect to the start of the previous stage effect, the output levels of the display, sound, and light were lowered to the lowest level, but for example, the sound may be silenced. However, the music or the like may be played at a predetermined level (for example, the lowest level). Further, in the first stage production and the second stage production, the voice of the dialogue may be output while playing the music.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels are illustrated as being lowered to an intermediate level with the start of the super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage effect is not limited to this. You may shift to the super reach production while maintaining the level raised in, or if you do not rise to the highest level in the latter stage production, you can move to the super reach production and then raise the level further. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels are lowered to the minimum level in response to the difficulty in recognizing the first half of the battle effect due to the shutter effect or the blackout effect, and then with the passage of time. Although the embodiment in which the output level is gradually increased to raise the effect stepwise is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-14 (B), for example, a movable body. When performing a fanning effect or the like suggesting the execution of the movable body effect before performing the effect, for example, the movable body 32 may be operated according to the output level of at least one of display, sound, and light. ..

Specifically, when the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the second position via the first position in the movable body effect, the movable body 32 is set as the origin position and the first in the previous stage effect before the movable body effect. The movable body 32 is reciprocated between the position and the position at a low speed, and the movable body 32 is reciprocated between the origin position and the first position at a higher speed than the previous stage effect in the latter stage effect. Move to the position. In this way, by gradually increasing the operating speed of the movable body 32, the effect may be raised stepwise.

Further, although the embodiment in which the moving speed of the movable body 32 is gradually increased is illustrated here, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the moving speed, the moving distance, and the number of movements of the movable body 32 is not limited to this. If the number of ones is increased step by step, the production can be raised step by step.

Further, when another effect such as the above-mentioned movable body effect is executed in parallel with the first stage effect and the second stage effect, for example, at least one level of the display, sound, and light output levels is output according to the other effect. However, other levels may be output according to the pre-stage effect or the post-stage effect.

(Characteristic part 175SG deformation example 2)
Next, the feature portion 175SG modification 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-15. 11-15 are explanatory views in which FIG. 11-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a special effect example 1, and FIG. 11-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a special effect example 2.

The shutter effect as a special effect that makes the effect being executed difficult to recognize exemplifies a form in which the displayed display image is made difficult to see by displaying the shutter image 175SG006, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, after the variable display mode is changed to the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the shutter image 175SG006 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (B) and 11-15 (C). Alternatively, it may be difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decorative pattern by displaying the effect image 175SG030 in such a manner that the display screen is torn apart.

In addition to the above, the staging image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the displayed image as described above includes a staging image that is different in mode from the variable display image of the displayed decorative pattern, and a movable body that imitates a movable body 32 or the like. It may be a moving image in which a body image is falling, a moving image in which the glass covering the display screen is broken, a moving image in which stones, coins, etc. are stacked, and the like can be changed in various ways. ..

Further, the blackout effect of the above embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the displayed display image is made difficult to recognize by setting the display screen to a black screen state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, after the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (D), the display screen is gradually changed to a white screen as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (E) and 11-15 (F). It may be difficult to visually recognize the displayed image by changing the display image or fading out or frame-out the displayed display image.

(Characteristic part 175SG deformation example 3)
Next, the feature portion 175SG modification 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17. 11-16 are explanatory views showing an example of a super reach effect operation as a modification of FIGS. 11-16. 11-17 are explanatory views, similarly, (I) to (L) are explanatory views showing an example of a super reach effect operation as a modification.

In the above-described embodiment, the first-stage effect and the second-stage effect are exemplified before the movable body effect is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is not limited to this. It may be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in the variable display of the super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, any one of the advance notice effects A to C is executed (see FIG. 11-16 (A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set as the reach display mode, and the normal reach effect is started (see FIG. 11-16 (B)).

Next, the blackout effect is executed during the execution of the normal reach effect (see FIG. 11-16 (C)), the display screen is changed to a black screen, and then the display screen becomes slightly brighter, and then the character image 175SG003 fades in. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-16 (D) (E)). Then, after the switching effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16 (F)), a character image 175SG040 (for example, “fierce fight”) suggesting the degree of expectation of the super reach effect is displayed (FIG. 11-16 (G)). (See), the movable body effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16 (H)).

After that, the blackout effect is executed again (see FIG. 11-17 (I)), the display screen is changed to a black screen, and after the display screen becomes slightly bright, the character image 175SG003 and the character image 175SG007 of the previous dialogue are displayed. It is displayed and the first stage effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (J)), then the character image 175SG008 of the second stage dialogue is displayed and the second stage effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (K)). Then, it develops into a super reach effect, and the reach title effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (L)).

Although the feature portion 175SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Is also included in the present invention.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
Further, in the feature unit 175SG, as an information display effect suggesting that the information is controlled in an advantageous state by displaying the information, a form in which the information consisting of characters as the lines of the character image is applied has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the information may include not only letters but also at least one of numbers, symbols, patterns, patterns, and the like as long as the information can be displayed.

In addition, the information is not limited to the information composed of a plurality of character information constituting the dialogue, and any displayable information suggesting that the information is controlled in an advantageous state can be obtained from a series of dialogue or sentences. It may be information consisting of words or one letter or number.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, the form in which the information display effect is composed of the first stage effect (first information display effect) and the second stage effect (second information display effect) is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be composed of three or more productions instead of the ones. Further, the content of the second information displayed in the second information display effect does not have to be the content following the content of the first information displayed in the first information display effect as in the embodiment. For example, the information may have a content different from that of the first information.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, the number of characters (second number) of the second information is smaller than the number of characters (first number) of the first information, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of characters of the first information and the second information may be the same, and the second number of the second information may be larger than the first number of the first information. Further, the display mode of the first information and the display mode of the second information may be different or the same.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, as a special effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images, a switching effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of character images appearing in the super reach effect and a notice effect A to C are applied. Although the form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image different from the character image may be used and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, an image related to each type of super reach. Is preferable.

Further, the switching effect exemplifies a mode in which an effect common to the super reach β1 and β2 can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, that is, , The display mode of switching may be different depending on the type of super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, super reach effects A and B are applied as the first specific effect suggesting that the player is controlled to the big hit game state, and the big hit game state is set more than when the first specific effect is executed. A form in which Super Reach C and D are applied is illustrated as a second specific effect suggesting that the controlled ratio is high, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Super reach effect C is applied as the first specific effect to be suggested, and super reach D is applied as the second specific effect to suggest that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. It may be applied.

Further, the feature unit 175SG exemplifies a mode in which super reach α1, α2, β1, β2 in which the first stage effect and the second stage effect are executed can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stage effect is not limited thereto. It may be possible to execute other types of super reach in which the latter stage effect is not executed.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, a mode in which the first stage effect and the second stage effect can be executed only by super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be executed by normal reach or non-reach. You may. Further, it may be possible to execute the effect during a big hit, which is different from the effect during the variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 175SG, as a pachinko game machine, a so-called type 1 2 that can be controlled to a big hit game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in a short time state after the big hit game of big hit A or big hit B is completed. Although the embodiment to which a kind of gaming machine is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property can be variously changed as long as it is a gaming machine capable of generating super reach. For example, a jackpot game A so-called type of pachinko gaming machine or the like that can be controlled to a probabilistic state after the end may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for the game. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Staging control CPU

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image and outputs a sound at a predetermined volume.
A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see, and
A first specific effect suggesting that the first specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific effect suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. A specific effect execution means that can execute either one of the above after the special effect, and
When the second specific effect is executed, a special notification effect for notifying that the second specific effect is executed after the special effect and before the start of the second specific effect is provided. Executable special notification effect execution means and
With
In a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered from the predetermined volume.
The special effect execution means is
The first special effect of lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume in the first period, and the mode of lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume and making it difficult to see in the second period longer than the first period are described above. It is possible to execute a second special effect that is different from the first special effect .
The second special effect is executed before either the first specific effect or the second specific effect is executed.
In the variable display of 1, the gaming machine is characterized in that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the first special effect is executed or the second special effect is executed . A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images is provided.
The special notification effect executing means notifies that the second specific effect is executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images larger than the suggested image.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images